Canon imagePROGRAF iPF720 printer User Manual

L a r g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r

User Manual

ENG

Contents

Contents

Introduction

How to use th�s manual ....................................................................................1

About Th�s User Manual ..............................................................................................................1

Search�ng Top�cs .........................................................................................................................3

HTML Vers�on of the Manual for Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................5

Printer Parts

1

13

Pr�nter parts ....................................................................................................13

Front ..........................................................................................................................................13

Back ..........................................................................................................................................14

Top Cover (Ins�de) .....................................................................................................................15

Carr�age .....................................................................................................................................16

Ink Tank Cover (Ins�de) ..............................................................................................................17

Control Panel .............................................................................................................................18

Control Panel ..................................................................................................20

Control Panel .............................................................................................................................20

Turn�ng the Pr�nter On and Off ..................................................................................................22

Pr�nter Modes ............................................................................................................................24

Sw�tch�ng Modes .......................................................................................................................29

Pr�nter Menu Operat�ons ...........................................................................................................31

Ma�n Menu Operat�ons ..............................................................................................................33

Menu Structure ..........................................................................................................................37

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs ...................................................................................................................50

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs (Dur�ng Pr�nt�ng) .......................................................................................62

Submenu D�splay ......................................................................................................................65

Status Pr�nt ................................................................................................................................67

Opt�onal accessor�es ......................................................................................73

Roll Holder Set ..........................................................................................................................73

IEEE 1394 (F�reW�re) Expans�on Board ....................................................................................73

Printer Specifications

......................................................................................74

Specifications

............................................................................................................................74

Bas�c Env�ronmental Performance ............................................................................................78

Pr�nt Area ...................................................................................................................................79

Basic Printing Workflow 80

Pr�nt�ng procedure ..........................................................................................80

Pr�nt�ng Opt�ons Us�ng Rolls and Sheets ..................................................................................80

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Rolls ...................................................................................................82

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Sheets ................................................................................................86

Pr�nt�ng from W�ndows ..............................................................................................................89

Pr�nt�ng from Mac OS X .............................................................................................................90

Contents ��

Contents

Cancel�ng pr�nt jobs ........................................................................................92

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from the Control Panel ............................................................................92

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from W�ndows ..........................................................................................93

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS X ........................................................................................94

Handling Paper 96

Paper ..............................................................................................................96

Types of Paper ..........................................................................................................................96

Paper S�zes .............................................................................................................................101

Handl�ng rolls ................................................................................................104

Select�ng the Paper Source .....................................................................................................104

Select�ng the Paper Type (Roll) ...............................................................................................105

Spec�fy�ng the Paper Length (Roll) ..........................................................................................106

Load�ng Rolls on the Roll Holder .............................................................................................107

Load�ng Rolls �n the Roll Holder Slot .......................................................................................109

Load�ng the Roll �n the Pr�nter ................................................................................................. 110

Remov�ng the Roll from the Pr�nter ......................................................................................... 113

Remov�ng Rolls From the Roll Holder Slot .............................................................................. 114

Remov�ng a Roll from the Roll Holder ..................................................................................... 114

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper .................................................................................................. 115

Feed�ng Roll Paper Manually .................................................................................................. 118

Detect�on of the Rema�n�ng Roll Paper ................................................................................... 119

Spec�fy�ng the Ink Dry�ng T�me for Rolls ..................................................................................120

Spec�fy�ng the Cutt�ng Method for Rolls ..................................................................................122

Cutt�ng the Lead�ng Edge of Roll Paper Automat�cally ............................................................126

Reduc�ng Dust from Cutt�ng Rolls ...........................................................................................127

Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................128

Attach�ng Accessor�es to the Roll Holder ................................................................................129

Handl�ng sheets ............................................................................................131

Select�ng the Paper Source .....................................................................................................131

Select�ng the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................132

Load�ng the Sheet �n the Pr�nter ..............................................................................................133

Manually Load�ng Paper to the Pos�t�on for Pr�nt�ng ...............................................................136

Remov�ng the Sheet ................................................................................................................137

Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................138

Output Stacker ..............................................................................................140

Us�ng the Output Stacker ........................................................................................................140

Working With Various Print Jobs 142

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images ..........................................................................142

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows) ..................................................................................142

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows, Mac OS X) ................................................................144

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows) ..................................................................................146

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................148

�� Contents

Contents

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs .................................................................................151

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ............................................................................................................151

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................152

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows, Mac OS X)..........................................................153

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................154

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................156

Spec�fy�ng Colors and Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ........................................................................159

Spec�fy�ng Colors and Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs (W�ndows) ......................................................160

HP-GL/2 Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................................................162

Printing Office Documents

............................................................................163


.......................................................................................................163

Printing Office Documents (Windows)

.....................................................................................164

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)

...................................................................................166

Us�ng the Pr�nter W�th a Color �mageRUNNER ............................................168

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER ............................168

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........168

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (Mac OS X) ........170

Enhanced Printing Options 172

Adjust�ng Images ..........................................................................................172

Adjust�ng the Color �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver ..................................................................................172

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (W�ndows) ............................................................174

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ..........................................................177

G�v�ng Pr�or�ty to Part�cular Graph�c Elements and Colors for Pr�nt�ng ...................................180

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (W�ndows) .........................................183

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS X) .......................................185

Choos�ng Paper for Pr�nt�ng ..........................................................................188

Choos�ng a Paper for Pr�nt�ng .................................................................................................188

Select�ng the Paper Type (Roll) ...............................................................................................189

Select�ng the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................190

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver .....................................................................................191

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) ...................................................................192

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) .................................................................194

Pr�nt�ng enlargements or reduct�ons .............................................................196

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze ............................................................................196

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ..........................................................197

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ........................................................199

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...................................................................................202

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .................................................................203

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...............................................................205

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value.......................................................................208

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (W�ndows).....................................................209

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS X) ................................................... 211

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER ............................214

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........214

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (Mac OS X) ........216

Contents ��

Contents

Pr�nt�ng at full s�ze .........................................................................................218

Pr�nt�ng on Overs�zed Paper ...................................................................................................218

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (W�ndows) ...............................................................................................220

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS X) ..............................................................................................222

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................225

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................227

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................229

Borderless Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................232

Borderless Pr�nt�ng on Paper of Equ�valent S�ze .....................................................................232

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ......................234

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ....................236

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...............................................239

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .............................241

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...........................243

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................246

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................248

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................250

Pr�nt�ng banners or at other non-standard s�zes ...........................................253

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng) .............................................253

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; W�ndows) .............................254

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS X) ...........................258

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes ...................................................................................261

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (W�ndows) .................................................................262

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS X) ................................................................266

T�l�ng and mult�ple pages per sheet ..............................................................268

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other ........................................................................268

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (W�ndows) ......................................................270

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) ....................................................272

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously ......................................................................................274

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (W�ndows) ....................................................................275

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS X) ..................................................................277

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet ...........................................................................................279

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................280

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) .......................................................................282

Pr�nt�ng Posters �n Sect�ons ....................................................................................................285

Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................286

Center�ng or�g�nals ........................................................................................288

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls .......................................................................................288

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (W�ndows) .....................................................................289

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ...................................................................291

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets ....................................................................................294

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (W�ndows) ..................................................................295

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) ................................................................297

Conserv�ng roll paper ....................................................................................299

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees ......................................................299

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (W�ndows) ....................................300

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ...................................302

�v Contents

Contents

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns ......................305

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (W�ndows) ....306

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS X) ..308

Check�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng ................................................................. 311

Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng .................................................................. 311

Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................313

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ...................................................................315

Other useful sett�ngs .....................................................................................316

Pr�nt�ng W�th Watermarks ........................................................................................................316

Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (W�ndows)......................................317

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on .................................................319

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (W�ndows) ...............................320

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS X) .............................322

Us�ng Favor�tes .......................................................................................................................325

Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................326

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................328

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng ..............................................................................................329

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ............................................................................330

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................331

Windows Software 333

Pr�nter Dr�ver .................................................................................................333

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................333

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) ...................................................................335

Confirming Print Settings (Windows)

.......................................................................................337

Check�ng the Layout �n a Prev�ew Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................339

Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................341

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ...................................343

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........345

Ma�n Sheet (W�ndows) ............................................................................................................347

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (W�ndows) ...............................................................350

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................351

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (W�ndows)............................................352

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (W�ndows) ..............................................................................353

Match�ng Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................355

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (W�ndows) ..................................................................357

Page Setup Sheet (W�ndows) .................................................................................................359

Paper S�ze Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) .............................................................................361

Layout Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................................362

Page Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................................364

Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ..................................................................................365

Favor�tes Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................366

Ut�l�ty Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................................368

Support Sheet (W�ndows) .......................................................................................................369

Dev�ce Sett�ngs Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................370

Sett�ngs Summar�es D�alog Box (W�ndows) ............................................................................371

Status Mon�tor ...............................................................................................372

�magePROGRAF Status Mon�tor (W�ndows) ...........................................................................372

Contents v

Contents

D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ...........................................................................373

D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ......................................................................................................373

PosterArt�st ...................................................................................................374

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals ................................................................................374

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals (W�ndows) ..............................................................375

Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .......................................................................................377

�magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................................377

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................377

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

...............................378

Mac OS X Software 379

Pr�nter Dr�ver .................................................................................................379

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................379

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) .................................................................380

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

.....................................................................................382

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ...................................................................384

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................385

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS X) .................................386

Ma�n Pane (Mac OS X) ...........................................................................................................387

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (Mac OS X) .............................................................389

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................390

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS X) ..........................................391

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................392

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) ......................................................................394

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................395

Ut�l�ty Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................................................397

Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................398

Support Pane (Mac OS X) .......................................................................................................399

Pr�ntmon�tor ..................................................................................................400

�magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor (Mac�ntosh) .............................................................................400

Network Setting 401

Network Sett�ng ............................................................................................401

Network Env�ronment ..............................................................................................................401

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer

...............................................................................403


...............................404

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel

...................................................405

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands

...............................................406

Us�ng RemoteUI ......................................................................................................................407

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings

.................................................................408

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings

.............................................................410

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings

............................................................... 411

Spec�fy�ng Pr�nter-Related Informat�on ....................................................................................413

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually

.....................................................................414

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur

.................................................415

In�t�al�z�ng the Network Sett�ngs ..............................................................................................416

v� Contents

Contents

Network Sett�ng (W�ndows) ..........................................................................417

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

.............................................................417

Shar�ng the Pr�nter �n W�ndows ...............................................................................................418

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings

...............................................................420

Specifying the Printer's Frame Type

........................................................................................422

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Pr�nt Serv�ces ..........................................................................................424

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Protocols .................................................................................................427

Configuring NetWare Network Settings

...................................................................................429

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................430


...............................430

Network Sett�ng (Mac OS X) .........................................................................431

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)

...........................................................431

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings

.............................................................432

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)

.............................................433

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)

.................................................436

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh)

................................................438

Hard Disk 439

Hard D�sk ......................................................................................................439

Pr�nter Hard D�sk Operat�ons ..................................................................................................439

Saved Pr�nt Jobs .....................................................................................................................441

Sav�ng Pr�nt Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Pr�nter Dr�ver .......................................444

Sav�ng Pr�nt Jobs ....................................................................................................................445

Do Not Save Pr�nt Jobs �n the Common Box ..........................................................................448

Manag�ng Queued Jobs (Delet�ng or Preempt�ng Other Jobs) ...............................................449

Sett�ng Passwords for Personal Boxes ...................................................................................452

Nam�ng Personal Boxes ..........................................................................................................456

D�splay�ng a L�st of Saved Jobs ..............................................................................................460

Pr�nt�ng a L�st of Saved Jobs ...................................................................................................464

Pr�nt�ng Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................465

Mov�ng saved jobs ...................................................................................................................470

D�splay�ng Deta�ls of Saved Jobs ............................................................................................475

Renam�ng Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................479

Delet�ng Saved Jobs ...............................................................................................................484

Check�ng the Free Hard D�sk Space .......................................................................................488

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk

..................................................................................490

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 491

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead .................................................................................491

Correct�ng Pr�nt M�sal�gnment .................................................................................................491

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Automat�cally ....................................................................491

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Manually ...........................................................................493

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Or�entat�on .........................................................................................495

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead He�ght ................................................................................................497

Adjust�ng the feed amount ............................................................................498

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Automat�cally ...............................................................................498

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Manually ......................................................................................501

Contents v��

Contents

Adjust�ng the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy ...........................................................504

Adjust�ng the Vacuum Strength ...............................................................................................506

Maintenance 507

Ink Tanks .......................................................................................................507

Ink Tanks .................................................................................................................................507

Replac�ng Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................508

Check�ng Ink Tank Levels ........................................................................................................513

When to Replace Ink Tanks .....................................................................................................514

Pr�ntheads .....................................................................................................515

Pr�nthead .................................................................................................................................515

Check�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty .......................................................................................................515

Improv�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty ......................................................................................................515

Check�ng for Nozzle Clogg�ng .................................................................................................516

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................517

Replac�ng the Pr�nthead ..........................................................................................................518

Cutter Un�t .....................................................................................................525

Cutter Un�t ...............................................................................................................................525

Replac�ng the Cutter Un�t ........................................................................................................526

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .................................................................................528

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................528

Replac�ng the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .....................................................................................528

Check�ng the Rema�n�ng Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge Capac�ty .....................................................535

When to Replace the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .........................................................................536

Clean�ng the Pr�nter ......................................................................................537

Clean�ng the Pr�nter Exter�or ...................................................................................................537

Clean�ng Ins�de the Top Cover ................................................................................................538

Clean�ng the Paper Reta�ner ...................................................................................................540

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................541

Other Ma�ntenance .......................................................................................542

Prepar�ng to Transfer the Pr�nter .............................................................................................542

Updat�ng the F�rmware ............................................................................................................546

Troubleshooting 547

Frequently Asked Quest�ons .........................................................................547

Frequently Asked Quest�ons ...................................................................................................547

Problems Regard�ng Paper ..........................................................................549

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................549

Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................552

Roll paper cannot be �nserted �nto the Paper Feed Slot ..........................................................554

Cannot Load Sheets ................................................................................................................554

Paper �s not cut neatly .............................................................................................................554

Paper cannot be cut ................................................................................................................554

v�� Contents

Contents

Pr�nt�ng does not start ...................................................................................555

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not l�ght up ............................................................555

The Pr�nter Does Not Respond Even �f Pr�nt Jobs are Sent ....................................................555

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink

......................................................555

The pr�nter stops dur�ng a pr�nt job ...............................................................556

An error message �s shown on the D�splay Screen .................................................................556

The pr�nter ejects blank, unpr�nted paper ................................................................................556

The pr�nter stops when pr�nt�ng a HP-GL/2 job (the carr�age stops mov�ng) ...........................556

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty .................................................................557

Pr�nt�ng �s fa�nt .........................................................................................................................557

Paper rubs aga�nst the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................558

The edges of the paper are d�rty .............................................................................................559

The surface of the paper �s d�rty ..............................................................................................560

The back s�de of the paper �s d�rty ..........................................................................................560

Pr�nted colors are �naccurate ...................................................................................................560

Band�ng �n d�fferent colors occurs ...........................................................................................561

Colors �n pr�nted �mages are uneven .......................................................................................562

Image Edges are Blurred or Wh�te Band�ng Occurs ...............................................................562

The contrast becomes uneven dur�ng pr�nt�ng ........................................................................562

The length of pr�nted �mages �s �naccurate ..............................................................................563

Documents are pr�nted crooked ..............................................................................................563

Documents are pr�nted �n monochrome ..................................................................................563

L�ne th�ckness �s not un�form (W�ndows) .................................................................................563

L�nes are m�sal�gned ...............................................................................................................563

Th�n l�nes are not pr�nted after sw�tch�ng to Economy Pr�nt�ng mode ......................................564

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty caused by the type of paper ..............................................564

Cannot pr�nt over a network ..........................................................................565

Cannot connect the pr�nter to the network ..............................................................................565

Cannot pr�nt over a TCP/IP network ........................................................................................565

Cannot pr�nt over a NetWare network .....................................................................................566

Cannot pr�nt over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ...................................................................566

Installat�on problems .....................................................................................567

The IEEE 1394 Dr�ver Cannot Be Installed Correctly ..............................................................567

Remov�ng Installed Pr�nter Dr�vers ..........................................................................................568

HP-GL/2 problems ........................................................................................569

W�th HP-GL/2, pr�nt�ng �s m�sal�gned. ......................................................................................569

L�nes or �mages are m�ss�ng �n the HP-GL/2 data that was pr�nted. .......................................569

L�nes Are Pr�nted Too Th�ck or Th�n Dur�ng HP-GL/2 Pr�nt�ng .................................................569

HP-GL/2 jobs are pr�nted �n monochrome (or color). ..............................................................569

Pr�nted Colors �n L�ne Draw�ngs are Inaccurate Dur�ng HP-GL/2 Pr�nt�ng ..............................569

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified

.............................................................570

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified

....................570

HP-GL/2 pr�nt�ng takes a long t�me. ........................................................................................570

The pr�nter stops when pr�nt�ng a HP-GL/2 job (the carr�age stops mov�ng) ...........................570

Contents �x

Contents

Other problems .............................................................................................571

The pr�nter does not go on ......................................................................................................571

If the Pr�nter Makes a Strange Sound .....................................................................................571

Messages adv�s�ng to check the ma�ntenance cartr�dge are not cleared ................................571

The pr�nter consumes a lot of �nk ............................................................................................572

Ink Level Detect�on ..................................................................................................................572

Error Message 575

Respond�ng to Messages .............................................................................575

Respond�ng to Messages ........................................................................................................575

Error Messages .......................................................................................................................576

Messages regard�ng paper ...........................................................................578

Paper M�smatch ......................................................................................................................578

Papr Type M�smatch ................................................................................................................578

Papr S�ze M�smatch ................................................................................................................578

Paper s�ze not detected. ..........................................................................................................579

Insufficient paper for job

..........................................................................................................579

Th�s paper cannot be used. .....................................................................................................579

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected. ..........................................................................................................580

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................580

The roll �s empty. .....................................................................................................................580

No sheets. ...............................................................................................................................581

Sheet pr�nt�ng �s selected. .......................................................................................................581

Regular pr�nt�ng �s selected, but a roll �s loaded. .....................................................................581

Cannot feed paper. ..................................................................................................................581

Paper jam. ...............................................................................................................................582

Paper loaded askew. ...............................................................................................................582

Cannot detect papr ..................................................................................................................582

Lead�ng edge detect�on error. ..................................................................................................583

Cannot feed paper. ..................................................................................................................583

Cannot cut th�s paper. .............................................................................................................583

End of paper feed. ...................................................................................................................583

Rel lever �s �n wrong pos�t�on. ..................................................................................................583

Borderless pr�ntng not poss�ble. ..............................................................................................584

Messages regard�ng �nk ................................................................................585

Ink insufficient.

.........................................................................................................................585

No �nk left. ...............................................................................................................................585

Rema�n�ng level of the �nk cannot be correctly detected. ........................................................586

Ink Level: Check ......................................................................................................................586

No �nk tank loaded. ..................................................................................................................586

Ink tank error. ..........................................................................................................................586

Messages regard�ng pr�nt�ng or adjusment ...................................................587

Use another paper. ..................................................................................................................587

Cannot print as specified.

........................................................................................................587

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................587

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................587

x Contents

Contents

Messages regard�ng pr�ntheads ...................................................................588

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................588

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................588

PHead needs clean�ng. ...........................................................................................................588

Problem w�th Pr�nthead ...........................................................................................................588

Pr�nthead error ........................................................................................................................589

Execute pr�nthead clean�ng. ....................................................................................................589

Messages regard�ng the ma�ntenance cartr�dge ...........................................590

No ma�ntenance cartr�dge. ......................................................................................................590

Prepare for ma�nt cart replacement. ........................................................................................590

No Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge capac�ty.........................................................................................590

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge full. ......................................................................................................590

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge problem. ..............................................................................................590

Messages regard�ng the hard d�sk ................................................................591

Hard d�sk error. ........................................................................................................................591

F�le read error. .........................................................................................................................591

Ma�l box full. ............................................................................................................................591

Ma�l box full. Now pr�nt�ng w�thout sav�ng data. .......................................................................591

Ma�l box nearly full. ..................................................................................................................591

Ma�l box full. Delete unwanted data ........................................................................................591

Ma�l box full. Cannot save. ......................................................................................................592

Messages regard�ng HP-GL/2 ......................................................................593

Th�s type of paper �s not compat�ble w�th HP-GL/2. ................................................................593

GL2: Wxxxx The memory �s full. (xxxx �s 0501, 0903, or 0904) ..............................................593

GL2: W0502 The parameter �s out of range. ...........................................................................593

GL2: W0504 Th�s command �s not supported. ........................................................................593

Other Messages ...........................................................................................594

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ...................................................................................594

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ..............................................................594

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ...........................................594

Top cover �s open. ...................................................................................................................595

Carr�age Cover �s open. ..........................................................................................................595

Prepare for parts replacement. ................................................................................................595

Parts replacement t�me has passed. .......................................................................................595

Unknown file.

...........................................................................................................................595

Mult�-sensor error ....................................................................................................................595

Contents x�

Contents x�� Contents

How to use this manual

Introduction

How to use this manual

About This User Manual

• Symbols

The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions or precautions in use.

Important Indicates important information that must be followed when using the printer. Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or operating errors.

Caution Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or damage to equipment or property. To ensure safe use, always follow these precautions.

Note Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on particular topics.

• Button names and user interface elements

Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Control panel buttons Example: Press the OK button.

Control panel messages

Software interface items

(Menus and Buttons)

Keyboard keys

Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.

Example: Click OK .

Example: Press the Tab key.

• Part names

Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Printer part names Example: Open the Top Cover.

• Cross-reference

Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Cross-reference in the same User Manual Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.

(→P.22)

Cross-reference in related manuals Example: See the Paper Reference Guide.

Other cross-reference Example: See the printer driver help.

Introduction 1


• Figures and software screens

• Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.

• Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates.

• Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.

• Trademarks

• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon

Inc.

• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

• Copyright

© 2008 Canon Inc.

• Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.

• May we request

Thank you for understanding the following points.

• The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.

• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, please contact us.

2 Introduction

Searching Topics

You can nd information in topics of this User Manual by searching for relevant terms.

1.

Enter a term and click the Search button.

Note

• To search for multiple terms at once, enter a space between each term.


Search results are listed at left.

Introduction 3


2.

Click a topic you want to read.

The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic.

To review multiple topics at once, select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply button.

4 Introduction


HTML Version of the Manual for Printing

You can select a group of topics in the table of contents or individual topics in this manual for printing.

The following procedure describes how to do this, using the information in Basic Printing Workow as an example.

Printing a group of topics in the manual

When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents, you can specify a group of topics to print.

1.

Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an example.

Introduction 5


2.

Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.

The topics in Basic Printing Workow are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.

6 Introduction

3.

Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button.


Printing a group of individual topics in the manual

When you access printable HTML versions from subtitles in the table of contents, you can specify a group of topics to print.

1.

Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an example.

Introduction 7


2.

Under Basic Printing Workow , click Printing Procedure .

3.

Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.

8 Introduction


The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.

4.

Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button.

Introduction 9


Printing selected topics

Print selected topics as follows.

1.

Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.

• Windows

In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link.In the shortcut menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

10 Introduction


• Macintosh

On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.

2.

Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).

• Windows

Introduction 11


• Macintosh

Note

• To print only individual topics that are displayed, use this method.

12 Introduction

Printer parts

Printer Parts

Printer parts

Front

a. Top Cover

Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed. (→P.15) b. Ejection Guide

Supports paper as it is ejected to prevent it from rising.

c. Maintenance Cartridge

Ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning is absorbed. (Replace the cartridge when it is full.) d. Maintenance Cartridge Cover

Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

e. Control Panel

Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.18) f. Ink Tank Cover

Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (→P.17) g. Stand

A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving the printer.

h. Output Stacker

A cloth tray that catches ejected documents.

i. Stopper

Locks the Stand casters.

Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the oor.

j. Accessory Box

For storing printer accessories.

Printer Parts 13

Printer parts

Back

a. Release Lever

Releases the Paper Retainer. Push this release lever back before loading paper or cleaning inside the printer.

b. Carrying Handles (Four Positions)

When carrying the printer, hold it by these handles under both sides.

c. Power Supply Connector

Connect the power cord to this connector.

d. Roll Holder Slot

Slide the Roll Holder into this guide slot.

e. Holder Stopper

Secure the roll on the Roll Holder with this part.

f. Roll Holder

Load the roll on this holder.

g. Accessory Pocket

Holds printer manuals, assembly tools, and other items.

h. Expansion Board Slots

Install an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board, as desired.

i. Ethernet Port

Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer.

j. USB Port

Connect a USB cable to this port. (Compatible with USB 2.0 High Speed mode) k. Paper Feed Slot

When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll here.

14 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Top Cover (Inside)

a. Top Cover Roller

Prevents paper from rising when ejected.

b. Paper Alignment Line

Align paper with this line when loading it.

c. Carriage

Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (→P.16) d. Carriage Shaft

The Carriage slides along this shaft.

e. Paper Retainer

Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.

f. Platen

The Printhead moves across the platen to print. The Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.

g. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves

These grooves catch ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.

h. Cleaning Brush

When cleaning inside of the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.

i. Linear Scale

The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.

Printer Parts 15

Printer parts

Carriage

a. Carriage Cover

Protects the Carriage.

b. Printhead Fixer Cover

Holds the Printhead in place.

c. Printhead

The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. It is a key part of the printer.

d. Printhead Fixer Lever

Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.

e. Shaft Cleaner

Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty.

f. Angle Adjustment Lever

Use this lever to ne-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.

g. Cutter Unit

A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting. The cutter blade is retracted inside when not cutting.

16 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

a. Ink Tank

Cartridges of ink in various colors.

b. Ink Tank Lock Lever

A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Open or close the lever when replacing an

Ink Tank.

c. Ink Lamp (Red)

Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.

• On

On: The Ink Tank is installed correctly.

• Off

Off: No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.

• Flashing Slowly

Not much ink is left.

• Flashing Rapidly

There is no more ink.

a. Ink Color Label

Load an Ink Tank corresponding to the color and name on these labels.

b. Ink Set

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “A” is printed on the label. (→P.507)

Printer Parts 17

Printer parts

Control Panel

a.

Online Button (Green)

Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.29)

• On

The printer is online.

• Flashing

The printer is switching modes.

• Off

The printer is ofine.

b.

Menu Button

Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.50) c. Data lamp (Green)

• Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.

This lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.

• Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

d. Message lamp (Orange)

• On

A warning message is displayed.

• Flashing

An error message is displayed.

• Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

e. Paper Source Section

After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.

1.

Roll Media lamp (Green)

• On

Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.

• Off

Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.

2.

Cut Sheet lamp (Green)

• On


• Off


18 Printer Parts

Printer parts f.

Feeder Selection Button

Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.

g. Display Screen

Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.

h. Color Labels

These labels indicate the Ink Tank colors. The labels correspond to the ink levels on the Display

Screen.

i.

◄ Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.

j.

▲ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to rewind the roll manually. (→P.118)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.

k.

▼ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.

(→P.118)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.

l.

► Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.

m.

OK Button

In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Press this button if the Display Screen indicates to do so.

n.

Information Button

Displays printer submenus. Press this key to display information about ink, paper, and so on.

(→P.65)

You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).

o.

Power Button

Turns the printer on and off. (→P.22) p.

Load/Eject Button

By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.

q.

Stop Button

Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.

Note

• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.

Printer Parts 19

Control Panel

Control Panel

Control Panel

a.

Online Button (Green)

Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.29)

• On

The printer is online.

• Flashing

The printer is switching modes.

• Off


b.

Menu Button

Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.50) c. Data lamp (Green)

• Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.

This lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.

• Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

d. Message lamp (Orange)

• On

A warning message is displayed.

• Flashing

An error message is displayed.

• Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

e. Paper Source Section

After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.

1.

Roll Media lamp (Green)

• On


• Off


2.

Cut Sheet lamp (Green)

• On


• Off


20 Printer Parts

Control Panel f.

Feeder Selection Button

Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.

g. Display Screen

Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.

h. Color Labels

These labels indicate the Ink Tank colors. The labels correspond to the ink levels on the Display

Screen.

i.

◄ Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.

j.

▲ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to rewind the roll manually. (→P.118)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.

k.

▼ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.

(→P.118)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.

l.

► Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.

m.

OK Button

In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Press this button if the Display Screen indicates to do so.

n.

Information Button

Displays printer submenus. Press this key to display information about ink, paper, and so on.

(→P.65)

You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).

o.

Power Button

Turns the printer on and off. (→P.22) p.

Load/Eject Button

By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.

q.

Stop Button

Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.

Note

• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.

Printer Parts 21

Control Panel

Turning the Printer On and Off

Turning the printer on

1.

Press the Power button to turn on the printer.

The printer will now start up.

After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait.

is displayed.

2.

The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper source section lamp remain lit.

The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.

• The Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover.

• The Ink Tank Cover is open

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

• The Printhead is not installed

Install the Printhead. For the instruction, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.518)

• Ink Tank is not installed

Install the Ink Tanks. For the instruction, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.508)

• If “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen

Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.

• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display

Screen

Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.

• No paper is loaded

Load paper. (→P.82) (→P.86)

Important

• Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.

22 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Turning the printer off

Important

• Never turn the printer off or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.

1.

Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.576)

If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after printing is nished.

2.

Hold down the Power button for more than a second.

After Shut Down.. Please Wait..

is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.

Printer Parts 23

Control Panel

Printer Modes

Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.

• Modes (→P.24)

• Mode transition (→P.25)

• Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.26)

• Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.27)

• Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.28)

• Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.28)

Modes

The printer has ve modes as follows:

• Online

The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.

• Ofine

Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being processed.

While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.

The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.

• Menu mode

Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.

• Submenu mode

Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.

• Sleep mode

The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.50)

If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the printer goes online and prints the jobs.

24 Printer Parts

Mode transition

The printer mode transitions are as follows:

Control Panel

*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return to the previous mode.

*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.

*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.

Printer Parts 25

Control Panel

Online, and state of the Control Panel

Not printing

Printing in progress (receiving or processing print jobs)

Display Screen

• Top Level of the Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.576)

• Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

• Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.513)

Control Panel

• Online lamp

Lit when the printer is online.

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.

• Message lamp

Lit when warning messages are displayed.

26 Printer Parts

Ofine, and state of the Control Panel

Ofine

Not printing Printing is paused

Control Panel

Display Screen

• Top Level of the Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.576)

• Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

• Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.513)

Control Panel

• Message lamp

Lit when warning messages are displayed.

Error Messages

If action can be taken If no action can be taken

• Top and Middle Levels of the Display Screen

Error messages are displayed.

• Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated.

(→P.513)


Error messages are displayed.

• Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

The corrective actions are displayed here.


The error message is displayed with the following instructions:

Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

.

• Display Screen

“ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

.

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received.

• Message lamp

Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Take action as needed. (→P.576)

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received.

• Message lamp

Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.

If the message is still displayed after this, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact the Canon dealer for assistance.

Printer Parts 27

Control Panel

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Main menu Menu items and settings Main menu (during printing)

• Display Screen

Pressing the Menu button when printing is not in progress displays the main menu.

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menus immediately under the current menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. (→P.33)

• Display Screen

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menu items or settings are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. (→P.33)

The menu of options available during printing (top gure) can be displayed by pressing the ► button when the main menu is displayed (left gure).

• Display Screen

Menus available during printing are displayed if you press the

Menu button during printing.

If you select a menu, the title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menus immediately under the current menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines.

The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. (→P.33)

Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Ink levels and the remaining

Maintenance

Cartridge capacity

Information of the loaded paper

Printer information GL2 Settings

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, printer information, and GL2 settings information.

(→P.65)

28 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Switching Modes

Switching the printer online/ofine

Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.

The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.

The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.

Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.

Printer Status When the Online Button is Pressed

Online The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes off.

Online, printing Switches ofine and printing is paused.

When printing is paused, the Printing menu is available.

Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.

Ofine

Ofine, when an error message is displayed

Menu mode

Menu mode, printing

In the case of error messages other than those shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer remains ofine until you solve the problem. The Online lamp remains off.

If the following error messages are displayed, the printer switches online and printing is resumed.

• Insufcient paper for job

• PHead needs cleaning.

• Papr Size Mismatch

• Papr Type Mismatch



Printing is resumed.

Printer Parts 29

Control Panel

Switching to Menu mode

Press the Menu button to display the main menu.

Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.

Printer Status When the Menu Button is Pressed

Online Switches to Menu mode.

Online, printing Either menus available during printing or a screen to manage print jobs is displayed. If you select a menu, the printer switches to that menu mode.

Ofine

Ofine, printing

Ofine, when an error message is displayed

Switches to Menu mode.

Menus available during printing are displayed.

You cannot access Menu mode until the problem is solved.

Press the Information button to display the submenus.

Press the Information button to display the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, as well as information on the loaded paper and the printer. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the information displayed. (→P.65)

Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Note

• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.

(→P.517)

30 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Printer Menu Operations

The printer menu includes a main menu and submenus.

• Main menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P.31)

• Main menu operations during printing (→P.31)

• Job Management Menu Operations (→P.32)

• Submenu operations (→P.32)

Main menu operations when no print job is in progress

Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel.

Note

• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed:

Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.

The following operations are available from the main menu.

• Paper settings

• Print settings

• Printer settings

• HP-GL/2 settings

For a description of specic items available in the main menu, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.50)

For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.33)

Note

• By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.

Main menu operations during printing

Selecting Menu Durng Prtng on the Menu Selection screen (displayed by pressing the Menu button on the

Control Panel during printing) will display only the menu options you can execute during printing, specically,

Head Cleaning , Fine Band Adj.

, and Information .

Note

• The Menu Selection screen will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed:

Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.

The following operations are available from the main menu during printing.

• Printhead cleaning

• Manual adjustment of the paper feed amount

• Display of printer-related information

For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings

(During Printing)”. (→P.62)

For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items during printing, see “Main Menu Operations”.

(→P.33)

Printer Parts 31

Control Panel

Job Management Menu Operations

To display the Job Mgmt Menu , press Job Mgmt Menu on the Menu Selection screen, which is displayed by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel during printing.

Note

• The Menu Selection screen will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed

You can access Menu mode after you have solved the problem.

The following operations are available from the Job Mgmt Menu .

• Job queue operations

• Operations involving the common mail box

• Operations involving personal boxes

For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings

(During Printing)”. (→P.62)

Submenu operations

Access submenus by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following information in submenus.

• Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity

• Ink levels

• Information on the loaded paper

• Printer information

• Job management

For a description of specic items displayed in submenus, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.65)

32 Printer Parts

Main Menu Operations

Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.50)

• Main menu when no print job is in progress

Control Panel

• Menu selection (if you press the Menu button when printing is in progress)

Note

• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed

You can access the Menu mode after you have solved the problem.

To access each function menu from the main menu, and set or execute menu items, use buttons on the

Control Panel.

The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual .

• Accessing Menus (→P.34)

• Specifying menu items (→P.35)

• Specifying numerical values (→P.36)

• Executing menu commands (→P.36)

Printer Parts 33

Control Panel

Accessing Menus

Printer menus are grouped by function.

Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.

• Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the menu list are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. If you navigate to the lowest-level menu and press the ▼ button again, the display switches to the top-level menu screen. If you navigate to the top-level menu and press the ▲ button again, the display switches to the lowest-level menu screen. Items you select are highlighted.

The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.

• The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. To access these lower level menus, select a menu and press ► .

• The upper level menus are available if “◄” is displayed at left. To access these upper level menus, select a menu and press ◄ .

34 Printer Parts

Specifying menu items

Follow the steps below to specify menu items.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.

The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.

Control Panel

After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.

3.

Press the Online button to bring the printer online.

Note

• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.

Printer Parts 35

Control Panel

Specifying numerical values

Follow the steps below to enter numbers for items such as network settings.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network.

7.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue entering numbers.

8.


Note

• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.

Executing menu commands

Follow the steps below to execute menu commands.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.

After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, the printer commonly reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.

36 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu Structure

Main Menu

The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.

For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.33)

For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.50)

First Level

Paper Cutting No

Second Level

*

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning

Media Menu

Paper Details

Yes

No *

Yes

Head Cleaning A *

Head Cleaning B

Cut Sheet Type (The paper type is displayed here.)

(*5)

Roll Media Type

(*1)

(The paper type is displayed here.)

(*5)

Chk Remain.Roll

Off *

On

Roll Length Set

(*2)

###.# m

### feet (*9)

Roll DryingTime Off (The paper type is displayed here.)

(*5)

30 sec.

1 min.

Scan Wait Time

3 min.

5 min.

10 min.

30 min.

60 min.

Off

1 sec.

3 sec.

5 sec.

7 sec.

9 sec.

Printer Parts 37

Control Panel

First Level Second Level Third Level

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Head Height

Skew Check Lv.

VacuumStrngth

Loose

Off

Automatic *

Strongest

Strong

Standard

Weakest

Width Detection Off

On *

NearEnd RollMrgn 3mm

20mm

Cut Speed Fast

Standard

Slow

Trim Edge First

Cutting Mode

CutDustReduct.

Automatic

Off

On

Automatic

Eject

Manual

Bordless Margin Automatic

Fixed

Off

Fourth Level

Automatic *

Band Joint

Print Length

From -0.70% to

0.70%

Automatic *

Highest

High

Standard

Low

Lowest

Standard *

Fifth Level

38 Printer Parts

Control Panel

First Level

Job Management

Second Level

Job Queue Ope.

Third Level

On

Fourth Level

NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm

20mm

Return Defaults

Job List

No

Yes

Delete

Com. BOX Ope.

Psnl. BOX Ope.

Job List

Print Job List

Folder List

Priority

Print

Delete

No

Yes

Job List

Print Job List

Fifth Level

Print

Delete

No

Yes

GL2 Settings Color Mode

Print Quality

Monochrome

Color (CAD) 1 *

Color (CAD) 2

Fast

Standard *

High

Input Resolution 600dpi *

Media Source

300dpi

Automatic *

Roll Paper

Cut Sheet

Conserve Paper Off *

Line Cap

Smoothing

Line Width

On

Software *

Rounded

Software *

Smooth

1 dot

2 dots

3 dots

Printer Parts 39

Control Panel

First Level

Adjust Printer

Second Level Third Level

4 dots *

5 dots

6 dots

7 dots

ThickenFineLines Off *

On

Fourth Level

AdjustFaintLines Off

On *

Auto Rotate Off

On

*

Nesting Use Nesting Off *

On

Nesting WaitTime 1-99 minutes

Cut Lines Off *

On

On-the-Fly Off *

On

ProcessingOption PageSizeProcess1 Off *

On

PageSizeProcess2 Off *

Auto Head Adj.

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

On

No

Yes

No

Yes

Off

On *

Manual Head Adj No

Yes

Auto Band Adj.

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

No

Yes

No

Yes

Manual Band Adj No

Yes

40 Printer Parts

Fifth Level

First Level

Interface Setup

Control Panel

Second Level

Adjust Length (*3) No

Third Level

Head Inc. Adj.

Yes

No

EOP Timer

Yes

10 sec.

30 sec.

TCP/IP

1 min.

2 min.

5 min.

10 min.

*

30 min.

60 min.

IP Mode

Protocol (*4)

Fourth Level

Automatic

Manual *

DHCP

IP Setting

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W

Fifth Level

On

Off *

On

Off *

On

Off *

0.0.0.0-

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0-

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0-

255.255.255.255

NetWare NetWare

Frame Type (*6)

On

Off *

Auto Detect

Ethernet 2

Ethernet 802.2

*

Ethernet 802.3

Ethernet SNAP

Print Service (*6) BinderyPServer

RPrinter

NDSPServer *

Printer Parts 41

Control Panel

First Level

Maintenance

System Setup

Second Level

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Third Level Fourth Level

NPrinter

On

Off *

Auto Detect On *

Off

Comm.Mode

(*7) Half Duplex *

Full Duplex

Ethernet Type (*7) 10 Base-T *

Spanning Tree

100 Base-TX

Not Use *

Use

MAC Address

No Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

IEEE1394

No

Yes

Repl. maint cart No

Replace P.head

Repl. S. Cleaner No *

Yes

Change Cutter No

Yes

*

Move Printer

Yes

No

Yes

Warning

No *

Yes

Buzzer Off

On *

Detect Mismatch Pause

Warning

None *

Keep Media Size Off *

On

Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1 ISO A3+ *

13"x19"(Super B)

42 Printer Parts

Fifth Level

First Level Second Level Third Level

Sht Selection 2

Noz. Check Freq.

Off

1 page

10 pages

Automatic *

Sleep Timer 5 min.

*

10 min.

15 min.

20 min.

30 min.

40 min.

50 min.

Length Unit

Time Zone

60 min.

240 min.

meter * feet/inch

0:London (GMT)

+1:Paris,Rome

+2:Athens,Cairo

+3:Moscow

+4:Eerevan,Baku

+5:Islamabad

+6:Dacca

+7:Bangkok

+8:Hong Kong

+9:Tokyo,Seoul

+10:Canberra

+11NewCaledonia

+12:Wellington

-12:Eniwetok

-11:Midway is.

-10Hawaii(AHST)

-9:Alaska(AKST)

-8:Oregon (PST)

Fourth Level

ISO B1

28"x40" (ANSI F)

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 43

Control Panel

First Level Second Level

Date Format

Date & Time

Third Level

-7:Arizona(MST)

-6:Texas (CST)

-5:NewYork(EST)

-4:Santiago

-3:Buenos Aires

-2:

-1:Cape Verde yyyy/mm/dd * dd/mm/yyyy mm/dd/yyyy

Date

Fourth Level yyyy/mm/dd (*8)

Time (*10)

Language

*

Fifth Level hh:mm

44 Printer Parts

Contrast Adj.

-4, -3, -2, -1, 0*, +1,

+2, +3, +4

Reset PaprSetngs No

Yes

Erase HDD Data High Speed No

Yes

Secure High Spd.

No

Yes

Secure No

First Level

Test Print

Information

Second Level Third Level

Yes

Fourth Level

Output Method

Save and Print

Save: Shared Box Off

On *

Status Print No

Yes

Media Details

Print Job Log

No

Yes

No

Print *

Print (Auto Del)

Save: Box XX

Off *

On

Menu Map

Nozzle Check

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

########-####

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start Time

Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed

HDD Information HDDSpace

*1: Available only if a roll is loaded.

*2: Available only if Chk Remain.Roll

is On .

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 45

Control Panel

*3: Available only if Feed Priority is Print Length .

*4: Available only if IP Mode is Automatic .

*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.96)The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control

Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.See the Media Conguration Tool Guide

(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

*6: Available only if NetWare is On .

*7: Available only if Auto Detect is Off .

*8: Follows the setting in Date Format .

*9: Follows the setting in Length Unit .

*10:Available only if the Date setting is specied.

46 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Submenus

Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the following order.

■The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

■Information of the loaded paper

■Printer information

■HP-GL/2 settings information

For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.65)

Printer Parts 47

Control Panel

Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.

For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.33)

For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.62)

First Level

Second

Level

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Menu Durng

Prtng

Head

Cleaning

Head

Cleaning A

Head

Cleaning B

Fine Band

Adj.

(*1)

From -5 to 5

Information System Info

Error Log

Job Log

########-

####


Document

Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start

Time

Print End

Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink

Consumed

Job Mgmt

Menu

Job Queue

Ope.

HDD

Information

Job List (Choose a print job)

Priority

Com. BOX

Ope.


Delete

Print

Delete

Print Job List No

Yes

48 Printer Parts

Seventh

Level

Control Panel

First Level

Second

Level

Psnl. BOX

Ope.

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Folder List (Enter a password if one has been set.)


Seventh

Level

Print

Delete

Print Job List No

Yes

*1: Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Band Joint .

Printer Parts 49

Control Panel

Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.

For instructions on selecting or setting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.33)

For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.37)

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Paper Cutting This command is available only if a roll is loaded.

Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. However, if paper cannot be advanced to the cut position, it will not be cut. In this case, manually advance the roll before cutting it. (→P.118)

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning

Media Menu

Paper Details

Job Management

GL2 Settings

When replacing ink tanks, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

(→P.508)

Clean the Printhead. (→P.517)

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .

Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.51)

Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing options. (→P.52)

Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.54)

Specify settings for HP-GL/2 printing. (→P.55)

Adjust Printer

Interface Setup

Maintenance

System Setup

Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.

(→P.57)

Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.58)

Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move the printer. (→P.59)

Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language. (→P.59)

Test Print

Information

Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.

Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details .

Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general, not specic in nature.)

Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.

Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.

Displays printer information and a record of print jobs. (→P.61)

50 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Paper Menu

Setting Item

Cut Sheet Type (*1)

Roll Media Type

Chk Remain.Roll

Roll Length Set

(*1)

Choose the type of sheets.

(→P.132)

Description, Instructions

Choose the type of roll.

(→P.105)

Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose

Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.

Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll

is On .

If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit .

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Printer Parts 51

Control Panel

Paper Details

Setting Item

(The type of paper is displayed here.)(*1)

Roll DryingTime

Scan Wait Time

Feed Priority

Adjust Length


Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.

Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.

Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select

Automatic . Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print Length may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.

Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length .

Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.

Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).

For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower adjustment value.

Head Height

Skew Check Lv.

Trim Edge First

Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.497)

If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection.

However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

VacuumStrngth

Width Detection

Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.

(→P.506)

Specify this option to print inside boundaries, for example, when printing at a different size than the paper size. Paper width and skew are not detected if you select Off . If paper is loaded askew, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

NearEnd RollMrgn Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.

Cut Speed Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing

Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.

If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.

52 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Setting Item

(The type of paper is displayed here.)(*1)

Cutting Mode

Bordless Margin

CutDustReduct.


Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.

Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after printing. If you choose Manual , the paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.

Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.

Adjust the margin during borderless printing.

Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is selected, choose Fixed . In this case, the paper width is not detected automatically, and the document is printed without borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.

Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting lm and similar media by printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper. (→P.127)

NearEnd Sht Mrgn Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.

Return Defaults Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the default values.


The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.

Printer Parts 53

Control Panel

Job Management

Job Queue

Ope.

Job List

Setting Item

(Choose a print job)

Delete

Priority

Com. BOX

Ope.

Job List

Print Job List


Print

Delete

Psnl. BOX

Ope.


Job List Print

Delete

Print Job List


Delete the current job or queued jobs. (→P.449)

Print the job rst after the current print job is nished. (→P.449)

Print jobs in the Common Box.

Delete jobs in the Common Box.

Print a list of jobs in the Common

Box.

Print jobs in Personal Boxes.

Delete jobs in Personal Boxes.

Print a list of jobs in Personal Boxes.

54 Printer Parts

Control Panel

GL2 Settings

Setting Item

Color Mode Monochrome

Color (CAD) 1

Color (CAD) 2

Print Quality

Input Resolution

Media Source

Conserve Paper

Line Cap


Print in monochrome.

Print in standard colors.

Print in brighter colors.

Choose the print quality.

Choose the printer input resolution, 600dpi or 300dpi .

Choose the media source for HP-GL/2 printing.

Conserves paper when printing.

Choose the shape of the end point, determined by Software or Rounded .

• If you choose Software

Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is specied by the application, the result is as shown in the

gure.

• If you choose Rounded

Smoothing Choose whether to print arcs as smooth curved lines or as multiple connected line segments.

• If you choose Software

Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is specied by the application, the result is as shown in the

gure.

Note: By default, this is a 72-sided gure

• If you choose Smooth

Line Width

ThickenFineLines

AdjustFaintLines

Choose the width for printing lines if no width is specied in the data. Dots in the line width are 300 dpi each.

Select On to print ne lines more distinctly.

If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other shapes, selecting Off may help produce the expected results. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

Printer Parts 55

Control Panel

Auto Rotate

Nesting


If the long side of an original is shorter than the roll width, the original is automatically rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper.

Similarly, if the long side of an original in landscape orientation is longer than the roll width and the short side is shorter than the roll width, the original is repositioned to t on the paper.

HP RTL print jobs are not rotated.(*1)

Use Nesting Selecting On will store print jobs until multiple documents can be arranged to ll up the roll width, instead of printing each print job as it is received.

Nesting WaitTime Specify a time to wait until printing, as desired.

On-the-Fly

Cut Lines Select On to print cut lines between each document on the roll.

Selecting On will start printing jobs sooner if you are printing only HP RTL print jobs and printing would not start until later.

However, images may be omitted in some cases, so be sure to check the printing results.

ProcessingOption PageSizeProcess1 Selecting On will print at the specied paper size. However, a 3 mm margin is subtracted from the paper size at each edge when printing; this margin is left blank.

Normally, the area available for printing excludes a margin required by the printer, and images are positioned accordingly.

Selecting On in this setting eliminates any misalignment of the printing position if the image itself includes a border.

PageSizeProcess2 Selecting On will determine the paper size based on the image rendering area.

*1: Because HP RTL images are not rotated even if the paper is rotated 90 degrees, images may be cut off or the blank paper may be ejected. In this case, set Auto Rotate to Off .

56 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Adjust Printer

Adjust Length

Head Inc. Adj.

Setting Item

Auto Head Adj.

Manual Head Adj

Auto Band Adj.

Manual Band Adj

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.


Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. (→P.491)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle, ink tank, and printing direction. (→P.491)

Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the

Advanced Adj.

operations after you replace the Printhead.

(→P.491)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern. (→P.493)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. (→P.498)

Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon paper or paper for which printing has been veried by Canon.

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and requires more ink than

Standard Adj.

(→P.498)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount based on the type of paper.

(→P.501)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the amount of adjustment. (→P.504)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the orientation of the Printhead. (→P.495)

Printer Parts 57

Control Panel

Interface Setup

Setting Item

EOP Timer

TCP/IP IP Mode

Protocol

IP Setting

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W


Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

Choose whether the printer IP address is congured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.

Specify the protocol used to congure the IP address automatically.

Specify the printer network information when using a static

IP address.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default gateway.

NetWare

AppleTalk

Ethernet

Driver

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

MAC Address

Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Specify the frame type to use.

Choose the print service.

Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Choose On for automatic conguration of the LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode

and Ethernet Type .

Choose the LAN communication method.

Choose the LAN transfer rate.

Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.

Displays the MAC address.

Choose the expansion interface.

Return Defaults/Execute?

is displayed if you press the

▼ button. Choose OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

58 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Maintenance

Setting Item

Repl. maint cart

Replace P.head

Repl. S. Cleaner

Change Cutter

Move Printer


When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.528)

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance

Cartridge capacity is low.

When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.518)

When replacing the Shaft Cleaner, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.528)

When replacing the Cutter Unit, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.526)

You can also reset the cut counter after the Cutter Unit is replaced.

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance

Cartridge capacity is low.

When transferring the printer to another location, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.542)

System Setup

Warning

Setting Item

Buzzer


Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.

Detect Mismatch Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning message) during printing if the paper type specied in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose

None to continue to print without notication. Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by pressing the Online button.

Keep Media Size Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the margin from being printed.

Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the printer menu, text or images will not be cut off. However, this requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.

Printer Parts 59

Control Panel

Setting Item

Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1

Noz. Check Freq.

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Date Format

Date & Time

Language

Contrast Adj.

Reset PaprSetngs

Erase HDD Data

Sht Selection 2

Date

Time


If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+ or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.

If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO B1 or 28"x40" (ANSI F) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.

Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.

Choose 1 page to check once per printed page. Choose 10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.

Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.

Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed.

You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.

Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean Time.

Specify the date format.

Set the current date.

Set the current time. Available only if the Date setting is specied.

Specify the language used on the Display Screen.

Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.

Restores settings that you have changed with Media

Conguration Tool to the default values.

For hard disk formatting operations.

60 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

Setting Item

Version Firm

Boot

MIT s/n

MAC

IP

########-####


Document

Name

User Name

Page Count


Displays the printer rmware version.

Displays the version of the boot ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address of the printer.

Displays the printer’s IP address.

Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).

Displays the document name in the last print job.

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

Job Status

Print Start

Time

Displays the results of the print job processed.

Displays the time when the print job was started.

Print End Time Displays the time when the print job was nished.

Print Time Displays the time required to print the job.

Print Size Displays the paper size in the print job.

HDD

Information

HDDSpace

Media Type

Interface

Displays the type of paper in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Ink Consumed Displays the ink consumption.

Displays the space available on the printer’s hard disk.

Printer Parts 61

Control Panel

Main Menu Settings (During Printing)

Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.

For instructions on selecting or setting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.33)

For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.37)


Menu Durng Prtng Head Cleaning Printhead cleaning options. (→P.517)

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .

Job Mgmt Menu

Fine Band Adj.

Information

Fine-tune the feed amount manually.

Displays the information about the printer and history of print jobs. (→P.63)

Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.64)

62 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

HDD

Information

Setting Item

Version

Ext I/F

Firm

Boot

MIT


Displays the version of the printer and rmware.

Displays the version of the boot ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the name of interfaces compatible with the expansion slot.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address.

s/n

MAC

HDDSpace Displays the space available on the printer’s hard disk.

Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).

########-####


Document Name Displays the document name in the last print job.

User Name

Page Count

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

HDDSpace

Job Status Displays the results of the print job processed.

Print Start Time Displays the time when the print job was started.

Print End Time Displays the time when the print job was nished.

Print Time Displays the time required to print the job.

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Displays the paper size in the print job.

Displays the paper type in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Ink Consumed Displays the ink consumption.

Displays the space available on the printer’s hard disk.

Printer Parts 63

Control Panel

Job Mgmt Menu

Job Queue

Ope.

Job List

Setting Item


Priority

Delete

Com. BOX

Ope.

Job List

Print Job List


Print

Delete

Psnl. BOX

Ope.


Job List

Print Job

List

Print

Delete


Print the job rst after the current print job is nished. (→P.449)

Delete the current job or queued jobs. (→P.449)

Print jobs in the Common Box.

Delete jobs in the Common Box.

Print a list of jobs in the Common

Box.

Print jobs in Personal Boxes.

Delete jobs in Personal Boxes.

Print a list of jobs in Personal

Boxes.

64 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Submenu Display

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information.

Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.

Note

• Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

• After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.

The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the

Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

Remaining ink is indicated as follows.

Information of the loaded paper

Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.

Printer Parts 65

Control Panel

Printer information

Displays the rmware version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and interface information.

GL2 Settings

The following settings information is displayed on two screens: HP-GL/2 Color Mode , Print Quality , Input

Resolution , Media Source , Conserve Paper , Line Cap , Smoothing , and Line Width , ThickenFineLines , and AdjustFaintLines .

66 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Status Print

You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.

With Status Print , information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the utilization level of consumables.

Printing Status Print Reports

1.

Load paper.

If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized. You will need at least four sheets.

2.

Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU .

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

Checking the information in the Status Print report

The following information is included in the Status Print report.

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print Printer model

Firm

Boot

MIT(DBF)

MIT(DB)

S/N

MC

C,M,Y,MBK,MBK2,BK

Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

MIT Database Format Version

MIT Database Version

Printer serial number

Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)

Ink levels.

The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.

Information on the loaded paper.

Media Menu

Roll Media Type

Check Remain. Roll

Cut Sheet Type

Adjust Printer

Head Adjust

Auto Print

A1-F2

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Current printer settings.

Printhead adjustment value.

Settings related to paper feeding.

Printer Parts 67

Control Panel

HP-GL/2 Settings

Color Mode

Print Quality

Input Resolution

Media Source

Conserve Paper

Line Cap

Smoothing

Line Width

HP-GL/2 setting values.

Interface Setup

EOP Timer

TCP/IP

Current network settings.

Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and canceling printing.

Settings related to TCP/IP .

IP Mode

Protocol

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Setting IP Setting values.

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

IP Address

Subnet

Mask

Default

G/W

NetWare settings.

Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.

Ethernet Driver settings.

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

MAC Address

68 Printer Parts

System Setup

Warning Current warning and error settings.

Buzzer

Detect mismatch

Keep Media Size Current paper-related settings.

Sheet Selection 1

Sheet Selection 2

Noz. Check Freq.

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Date Format

Language

Contrast Adj.

Nozzle-check settings.

General printer settings.

Information

RAM

Error Log

HDD Capacity

System information and an error log.

Control Panel

Printer Parts 69

Control Panel

Network (RemoteUI)

TCP/IP

Frame Type

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

Enable DNS Dynamic

Update

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address*

Subnet Mask*

Gateway Address*

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

RAW Printing

Raw Port Number

Raw Mode Bi-direction

FTP Printing

Primary DNS Server

Address*

Secondary DNS Server

Address*

DNS Host Name*

DNS Domain Name*

SMTP Server Address*

Multicast DNS Service

Name

Current network settings used by RemoteUI.

*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.

NetWare Current NetWare settings.

Frame Type

IPX External Network

Number*

Node Number*

Print Service

*: Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.

70 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Bindery PServer

File Server

Name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

Polling Interval

RPrinter

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*

NDS PServer

Tree Name*

Context name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

NPrinter

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*

Values set when selected.

Values set when

Values set when

Values set when

NetWare

NetWare

NetWare

NetWare

>

>

>

>


AppleTalk Current AppleTalk settings.

Phase Type

Name*

Network Number*

Zone*

Print Service

Print Service

Print Service

Print Service

>

>

>

>

Bindery PServer

RPrinter

NDS PServer

NPrinter is is selected.

is selected.

is selected.


HEAD LOT NUMBER Printhead lot number.

LOT

PARTS STATUS

COUNTER A-V

Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.

Printer Parts 71

Control Panel

COUNTER

CUTTER

MEDIA

MEDIA1-7

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

AFTER INSTALLATION

Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how much they have been used).

72 Printer Parts

Optional accessories

Optional accessories

Roll Holder Set

A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment, and 3-Inch Paper

Core Attachment.

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, remove the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment from the Holder Stopper and then attach the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on both the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper.

To load a roll with a 2-inch paper core, remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment from both the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper and then attach the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Holder Stopper. (→P.129)

• Roll Holder Set RH4-32 (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)

IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board

An interface board to add an IEEE 1394 (also called "FireWire") port.

• IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-05

Caution

• Note that EB-04 is incompatible.

For instructions on installing the IEEE 1394 expansion board, refer to the documentation provided with the optional IEEE 1394 expansion board.

Printer Parts 73

Printer Specications

Printer Specications

Specications

Important

• This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.

• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.

Printer

Power supply

Power consumption During operation

Sleep mode

Operating noise

Operating environment

Standby

Temperature

Humidity

Dimensions (W × D × H) Printer and Stand

(including Roll Holder and Output Stacker )

Weight Printer and Stand (not including the Printhead and Ink Tank )

Space for installation (W × D × H)

Applicable standards

Off

During operation

100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

140 W max.

100-120 V: 5 W max.

(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

220-240 V: 6 W max.


1 W max. (*1)

Approx. 52 dB (A) max.

Approx. 35 dB (A) max.

15-30°C (59-86°F)

10-80%, non-condensing

1,507× 871 × 1,097 mm (59.3 × 34.3 × 43.2 in)

65 kg (143.3 lb)

2,307× 2,071 × 2,000 mm (90.8 × 81.5 × 78.7 in)

International Energy Star Program, Law on

Promoting Green Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, The Eco

Declaration, WEEE, U.S. presidential directives,

J-MOSS (Green Mark)

*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

Printing performance

Print method

Maximum resolution

Printhead

Bubblejet

2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically

PF-03

Number of nozzles

• MBK: 5,120

• 2,560 nozzles each for BK, C, M, and Y

*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.

74 Printer Parts


Interface

Expansion Board Slots

USB 2.0(*1)

Ethernet

IEEE 1394

Format

Mode

Connector

Format

Specication

Protocols

Format

Specication

1

Internal port

Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps)

Series B (4-pin)

Internal port

IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX

/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex

IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, HTTP, TCP/IP,

AppleTalk

Optional board (compatible with the expansion slot)

IEEE 1394-1995, conforms to P1394a Specication ver. 2.0, half duplex, Data/Strb differential serial

100/200/400 Mbps

Conforms to IEEE 1394-1995 (6-pin), no power supply

Transfer speed

Connector

*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:

• Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible

• Operating system: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows

2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.3 or later

• USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)

• USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable

Ink

Ink Tank BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink ) Dye ink

MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black Ink, or black ink for matte paper)

Pigment ink

C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink )

M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink )

Dye ink

Dye ink

Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink ) Dye ink

Capacity

*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 90 ml (3.0  oz) each.

PFI-102BK

PFI-102MBK

PFI-102C

PFI-102M

PFI-102Y

130 ml (4.4  oz) per color (*1)

Printer Parts 75


Paper (*1)

Paper width

Maximum length per page

Thickness

Paper Size

Print area

Rolls

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

Roll width

Sheets

Normal size

Borderless printing

(*2)

Supported width for borderless printing

203-917 mm (8-36.1 in)

18 m (19.9 yd)

1.6 m (1.7 yd)

0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)

0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)

36-in Roll (914 mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841 mm), 30-in Roll (762 mm), JIS B1/B2 Roll (728 mm), 24-in Roll (610 mm), ISO A1/A2

Roll (594 mm), JIS B2/B3 Roll (515 mm), 17-in Roll (432 mm),

ISO A2/A3 Roll (420 mm), 16-in Roll (407 mm), 14-in Roll (356 mm), ISO A3/A4 Roll (297 mm), 10-in Roll (254 mm)

ISO A0, ISO A1, ISO A2, ISO A2+, ISO A3, ISO A3+, ISO A4,

ISO B1, ISO B2, ISO B3, ISO B4, JIS B1, JIS B2, JIS B3, JIS

B4, 34"x44" (ANSI E), 28"x40" (ANSI F), 22"x34" (ANSI D),

17"x22" (ANSI C), 11"x17" (Ledger), 13"x19" (Super B), Letter

(8.5"x11"), Legal (8.5"x14"), 36"x48" (ARCH E), 30"x42" (ARCH

E1), 26"x38" (ARCH E2), 27"x39" (ARCH E3), 24"x36" (ARCH

D), 18"x24" (ARCH C), 12"x18" (ARCH B), 9"x12" (ARCH A),

DIN C0, DIN C1, DIN C2, DIN C3, DIN C4, 20"x24", 18"x22",

14"x17", 12"x16", 10"x12", 10"x15", 8"x10", US Photo (16"x20"),

Poster 20"x30", Poster 30"x40", Poster 300x900mm, 13"x22"

Printable area

• Rolls

3 mm (0.12 in) from each side

• Sheets

3 mm (0.12 in) from the top and each side, and 23 mm (0.91

in) from the bottom

Guaranteed print area

• Rolls

20 mm (0.79 in) from the top, 5 mm (0.20 in) from the bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) from each side

• Sheets

20 mm (0.79 in) from the top, 23 mm (0.91 in) from the bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) from each side

For information on the guaranteed print area, see “Print Area”.

(→P.79)

Printable area (rolls)

Entire surface

36-in Roll (914 mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841 mm), JIS B1/B2 Roll

(728 mm), 24-in Roll (610 mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll (594 mm), JIS

B2/B3 Roll (515 mm), 16-in Roll (407 mm), 14-in Roll (356 mm),

10-in Roll (254 mm)


*2: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.

76 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Capacity on the hard disk to store image data

Print job storage capacity

48 GB

• Common mail box: 100 jobs

• Personal boxes: 100 jobs


Printer Parts 77


Basic Environmental Performance

Printer

Power consumption Sleep mode

Off

Resource efciency Weight

Product safety

Dimensions (W × D

× H)

Recycling

Printer and Stand : 1,507 × 871 × 1,094 mm (59.3 × 34.3 ×

43.1 in)

Recyclable plastic used for printer body

Toxic substances

100-120 V: 5 W max.


220-240 V: 6 W max.


1 W max.

Printer and Stand : 65 kg (143.3 lb)

Operating noise

Structural components: No prohibited brominated ame retardants used (PBB or PBDE)

Body plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], or Cd) or halogenated ame retardants used

During operation: Approx. 52 dB (A) max. (6.6 bels or less)

Standby: Approx. 35 dB (A) max. (6.3 bels or less)

Packaging materials

Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], and

Cd)

None (none in packaging)

78 Printer Parts


Print Area

A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.

Printable Area

Top Edge Bottom Edge

Recommended Print Area

Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides

Sheets

3 mm (0.12

in)

23 mm (0.91

in)

Sides

3 mm (0.12

in)

20 mm (0.79

in)

23 mm (0.91

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

Rolls

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

20 mm (0.79

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

Sheets

• Printable Area:

A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right sides is required.

• Recommended print area:


Rolls

• Printable Area:

A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on the top, bottom, and both sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

• Recommended print area:


Note

• Printable area: The area that can be printed.

• Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

• To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin. (→P.218)

Printer Parts 79

Printing procedure

Basic Printing Workow

Printing procedure

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

The printer supports both rolls and sheets.

This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets to suit your particular printing application.

Note

• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

• A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing method that suits your particular printing application, referring to "Working With Various Print Jobs" and

"Enhanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.

Roll printing

Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in the printer.

Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

• Large-format printing

Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Ofce applications.

(→P.253)

• Borderless printing

Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.

(→P.232)

(→P.239)

(→P.225)

• Banner printing

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

(→P.274)

• 90-degree rotation before printing

Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efciently.

(→P.299)

• Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.

(→P.196)

(→P.202)

(→P.208)

• Free Layout function

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(→P.268)

80 Basic Printing Workow

Printing procedure

Sheet printing

Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.

Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.

• Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.

(→P.196)

(→P.202)

(→P.208)

• Free Layout function

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(→P.268)

Basic Printing Workow 81

Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Rolls

These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.

Follow the steps below to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.

Note

• Before printing banners or other long documents, spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor. Otherwise use the optional Output Stacker.

Otherwise, long sheets that touch the oor after printing may become dirty.

• If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (→P.122)

1.

Turn the printer on. (→P.22)

2.

Select a roll as the paper source. (→P.104)

3.

Set a roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.107)


4.

Load the roll in the Roll Holder Slot. (→P.109)

5.

Load the roll in the printer. (→P.110)

6.

Select the paper type. (→P.105)

7.

Specify the paper length. (→P.106)

Printing procedure


Printing procedure

8.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.192)

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.194)

Important

• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message may be displayed and printing may not be possible.

• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.578)

• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.578)

• Paper Mismatch (→P.578)


Printing procedure

9.

Send the print job.

• Printing from Windows (→P.89)

• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.90)

Start printing.

Note

• You can skip steps 6 and 7 if a barcode has been printed on the roll paper and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll. The paper type and amount of paper left are automatically detected. The barcode will automatically be cut off after it has been read.

• You can skip step 6 if you have deactivated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper.

• If you have deactivated width detection, you will need to enter the roll width after choosing the paper type in step 5. (→P.50)

• If you select a type of paper for which width detection is Off when detection of the remaining roll paper is also Off , you will need to advance the paper manually to the starting position for printing. (→P.136)

• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.101) (→P.96)

• When printing on rolls after printing on sheets, if the lit paper selection lamp does not switch from the

Cut Sheet lamp to the Roll Media lamp , press the Feeder Selection button.

Important

• After changing rolls, clean the Platen. (→P.538)


Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Sheets

These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.

Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.

1.


2.

Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

• Roll (→P.113)

• Sheet (→P.137)


Printing procedure

3.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type and size of paper and other details.



4.

Send the print job.

• Printing from Windows (→P.89)

• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.90)


Printing procedure

5.

Load the sheet. (→P.133)

Note

• If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, after you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. Follow these steps.

• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.132)

Start printing.

Note

• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.136)

• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.101) (→P.96)


Printing procedure

Printing from Windows

Print from the application software menu.

Important

• The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:

• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

• Windows Vista

• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

1.

In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.

Note

• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the application software. In most cases, the dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Note

• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box displayed after clicking Printer .

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:

• From the application software

(→P.343)

• From the operating system menu

(→P.345)


Printing procedure

Printing from Mac OS X

Print from the application menu after registering the printer.

Important

• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

Registering the printer

Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).

For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.

(→P.431)

Important

• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.

• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.433)

Note

• When registering the printer, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, Canon FireWire(iPF) if connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk , Canon IP(iPF) , or Bonjour if connected via a network.

• For Canon IP(iPF) connections, enter the printer’s IP address.


Printing procedure

Printing from the application software

1.


Note

• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3.

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.


Canceling print jobs

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.

Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or more during printing.

• If you press the Stop button before printing starts

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings the printer online.

When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected, the printer goes ofine.

• If you press the Stop button during printing

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.

• If you press the Stop button when printing is paused

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.



Canceling Print Jobs from Windows

You can cancel print jobs in the printer window.

1.

Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.

Note

• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or

Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.

2.

Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel .

Note

• The print job is displayed on the printer screen during the transmission of print data from the computer. When the transmission is nished, the job is not displayed even during printing.

To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.

1.

If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.

Do the following if no print jobs are shown in the printer window (because they have already been sent to the printer).

1.

Double-click the taskbar icon to access the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

2.

On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job .



Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X

You can cancel print jobs in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .

1.

Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.

2.

Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.

In this window, you can cancel jobs sent to the printer.

Note

• The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the computer. When the transmission is completed, the job is not displayed even during printing.

Alternatively, you can cancel print jobs as follows.

1.

Click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .



2.

Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

Note

• The print job is displayed on the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window while the printer receives the print data from the computer. It is not displayed before transmission of print data to the printer, even if the computer has started the process of the data.

3.

Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor . In the printer window, click Start Jobs .

Important

• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.

To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.

1.

If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.


Paper

Handling Paper

Paper

Types of Paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . This guide identies supported plain paper, coated paper, photo paper (such as glossy photo paper), proong paper,

CAD paper, and other types of paper. The Paper Reference Guide identies types and specications of paper, as well as information on printer driver settings and tips on handling paper.

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel, and in the printer driver by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website.

Note

• The media types with "†" marked in the product name are those specied as genuine Canon media.

For other media, please contact the respective media manufacturer after reading the instruction manuals supplied with the media.

96 Handling Paper

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide

You can access the Paper Reference Guide as follows. Follow the steps for your particular operating system.

• Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

Paper

The online support window is displayed.

2.

Select Paper Reference Guide .

The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

Handling Paper 97

Paper

• Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock .


2.

Select Paper Reference Guide .

The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

98 Handling Paper

Updating paper information

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media Conguration Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration

Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Follow these steps to access the imagePROGRAF website.

Important

• When you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool, the paper type setting on the

Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software is updated.

• Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

Paper


2.

Select Stay Informed .

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Handling Paper 99

Paper

• Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock .


2.

Select Stay Informed .

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Note

• In Windows, you can also access the imagePROGRAF webpage by clicking the start menu, selecting

Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > iPFxxxx

Media Conguration Tool to start the Media Conguration Tool, and clicking Extra Information.

• On a Macintosh computer, you can also access the imagePROGRAF website from the Finder by selecting Applications > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > MCTxxxx to start the Media Conguration Tool and then clicking Extra Information.

100 Handling Paper

Paper Sizes

Rolls

Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.

• Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6.0 in)

• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches

• Printing side out

Roll width Roll Paper Width Settings in Printer Driver

914.4 mm (36.00 in) 36-in. Roll (914.4mm)

841.0 mm (33.11 in)

762.0 mm (30.00 in)

728.0 mm (28.66 in)

609.6 mm (24.00 in)

594.0 mm (23.39 in)

515.0 mm (20.28 in)

431.8 mm (17.00 in)

420.0 mm (16.54 in)

406.4 mm (16.00 in)

355.6 mm (14.00 in)

297.0 mm (11.69 in)

254.0 mm (10.00 in)

Custom Paper Size

ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm)

30-in. Roll (762.0mm)

JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm)

24-in. Roll (609.6mm)

ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm)

JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm)

17-in. Roll (431.8mm)

ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm)

16-in. Roll (406.4mm)

14-in. Roll (355.6mm)

ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm)

10-in. Roll (254.0mm)

203.2 mm (8.00 in) - 917.0 mm (36.10 in)

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Borderless Printing (*1)

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.96)

Paper

Handling Paper 101

Paper

Sheets

Sheets of the following sizes are supported.

ISO A0

Paper Size Dimensions

841.0 × 1189.0 mm (33.11 × 46.81 in)

ISO A1 594.0 × 841.0 mm (23.39 × 33.11 in)

ISO A2

ISO A2+

ISO A3

ISO A3+

ISO A4

ISO B1

ISO B2

ISO B3

ISO B4

JIS B1

JIS B2

JIS B3

JIS B4

34"x44"(ANSI E)

28"x40"(ANSI F)

22"x34"(ANSI D)

17"x22"(ANSI C)

11"x17"(Ledger)

13"x19"(Super B)

Letter(8.5"x11")

Legal(8.5"x14")

36"x48"(ARCH E)

30"x42"(ARCH E1)

26"x38"(ARCH E2)

27"x39"(ARCH E3)

24"x36"(ARCH D)

18"x24"(ARCH C)

12"x18"(ARCH B)

9"x12"(ARCH A)

DIN C0

DIN C1

DIN C2

420.0 × 594.0 mm (16.54 × 23.39 in)

431.8 × 609.6 mm (17.00 × 24.00 in)

297.0 × 420.0 mm (11.69 × 16.54 in)

329.0 × 483.0 mm (12.95 × 19.02 in)

210.0 × 297.0 mm (8.27 × 11.69 in)

707.0 × 1000.0 mm (27.83 × 39.37 in)

500.0 × 707.0 mm (19.69 × 27.83 in)

353.0 × 500.0 mm (13.90 × 19.69 in)

250.0 × 353.0 mm (9.84 × 13.90 in)

728.0 × 1030.0 mm (28.66 × 40.55 in)

515.0 × 728.0 mm (20.28 × 28.66 in)

364.0 × 515.0 mm (14.33 × 20.28 in)

257.0 × 364.0 mm (10.12 × 14.33 in)

863.6 × 1117.6 mm (34.00 × 44.00 in)

711.2 × 1016.0 mm (28.00 × 40.00 in)

558.8 × 863.6 mm (22.00 × 34.00 in)

431.8 × 558.8 mm (17.00 × 22.00 in)

279.4 × 431.8 mm (11.00 × 17.00 in)

330.2 × 482.6 mm (13.00 × 19.00 in)

215.9 × 279.4 mm (8.50 × 11.00 in)

215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.50 × 14.00 in)

914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36.00 × 48.00 in)

762.0 × 1066.8 mm (30.00 × 42.00 in)

660.4 × 965.2 mm (26.00 × 38.00 in)

685.8 × 990.6 mm (27.00 × 39.00 in)

609.6 × 914.4 mm (24.00 × 36.00 in)

457.2 × 609.6 mm (18.00 × 24.00 in)

304.8 × 457.2 mm (12.00 × 18.00 in)

228.6 × 304.8 mm (9.00 × 12.00 in)

917.0 × 1296.0 mm (36.10 × 51.02 in)

648.0 × 917.0 mm (25.51 × 36.10 in)

458.0 × 648.0 mm (18.03 × 25.51 in)

102 Handling Paper

Paper Size

DIN C3

DIN C4

20"x24"

18"x22"

14"x17"

12"x16"

10"x12"

10"x15"

8"x10"

US Photo 16"x20"

Poster 20"x30"

Poster 30"x40"

13"x22"

Poster 300x900mm

Custom Paper Size

Dimensions

324.0 × 458.0 mm (12.76 × 18.03 in)

229.0 × 324.0 mm (9.02 × 12.76 in)

508.0 × 609.6 mm (20.00 × 24.00 in)

457.2 × 558.8 mm (18.00 × 22.00 in)

355.6 × 431.8 mm (14.00 × 17.00 in)

304.8 × 406.4 mm (12.00 × 16.00 in)

254.0 × 304.8 mm (10.00 × 12.00 in)

254.0 × 381.0 mm (10.00 × 15.00 in)

203.2 × 254.0 mm (8.00 × 10.00 in)

406.4 × 508.0 mm (16.00 × 20.00 in)

508.0 × 762.0 mm (20.00 × 30.00 in)

762.0 × 1016.0 mm (30.00 × 40.00 in)

329.0 × 558.0 mm (12.95 × 21.97 in)

300.0 × 900.0 mm (11.81 × 35.43 in)

203.2 × 203.2 mm (8.00 × 8.00 in) - 917.0 × 1600.0 mm (36.10 × 62.99 in)

Paper

Note

• In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system” such as ISO

A or ANSI.

In Windows, some size systems are not available by default. Follow the steps below to make them available.

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box.

2.

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

3.

Click Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

4.

Select the Display Series check box.

• For details on non-standard paper sizes, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.261)

• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

Handling Paper 103

Handling rolls

Handling rolls

Selecting the Paper Source

When advancing paper, press the Feeder Selection button and select the source.

You can determine the selected source by checking which lamp is lit-either the Roll Media lamp (a) or the

Cut Sheet lamp (b).

• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.

• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets.

Note

• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, a message is shown on the Display Screen, either Remove roll?

or Eject sheet?

when you press the Feeder Selection button.

When removing the paper, press the OK button.

• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

• If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.575)

• If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

• If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

• When in the process of loading paper

Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.

• When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks

Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.

• If the Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.

104 Handling Paper

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)

When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.

Handling rolls

Important

• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.

(→P.498)

(→P.497)

Note

• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the

Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.106)

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)By factory default, Plain

Paper is selected.

• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.


5.


Handling Paper 105

Handling rolls

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)

When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.

Note

• When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, Chk Remain.Roll

must be set to On . If it is

Off , the Roll Length Set menu is not shown.

• After you specify the roll type, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the roll length on the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length Set , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Specify the roll length as follows.

1.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

2.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.

5.


106 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder

When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.

Attach the 2-inch or 3-inch paper core attachment to the roll holder, depending on the size of the paper core of the roll you will use. The printer is delivered with the 2-inch paper core attachment installed. (→P.129)

Important

• Cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue. Otherwise, it may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality. Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.

• Wind up the roll so that the edge is even across the roll. This may cause feeding problems.

Caution

• Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause injury.

Note

• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.101) (→P.96)

• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load the paper.

1.

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

Handling Paper 107

Handling rolls

2.

With the edge of the roll paper facing back as shown, set the roll with the Roll Holder from the right. Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder.

Important

• When loading a roll, be careful to avoid hitting the printer hard with the roll. This may damage the Roll Holder.

3.

Insert the Holder Stopper from the right in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position indicated (b), push it rmly in until the ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the

Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.

108 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Loading Rolls in the Roll Holder Slot

Once a roll is in the Roll Holder, follow these steps to load the roll in the Roll Holder Slot.

Holding the Roll Holder so that the side with the white gear faces the side of the Roll Holder Slot with a white gear, load the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the grooves (b) on both ends of the Roll Holder Slot.

Caution

• Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it.

• Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Roll Holder shaft (a) and the guide grooves (b) when loading rolls.

At this point, to advance the roll, see “Loading the Roll in the Printer”. (→P.110)

Handling Paper 109

Handling rolls

Loading the Roll in the Printer

Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.

Note

• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

• Roll (→P.113) (→P.114)

• Sheet (→P.137)

• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.538)

1.

Push the Release Lever back and pull out the roll paper evenly on both ends. Insert the edge in the Paper Feed Slot (a) and advance the paper until vacuuming paper starts.

After the paper reaches the Platen, it is automatically advanced and vacuuming paper starts.

Important

• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

• If it is difcult to insert the roll paper in the Paper Feed Slot, insert the left or right corner in the slot

rst, and then straighten the paper as you advance it.

• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.

Note

• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is open. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Set vacuum stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three settings are available.

110 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

2.

Open the Top Cover.

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).

3.

Pull the roll edge gently and align it with the Paper Alignment Line (a). Lower the Release

Lever toward the front.

Important

• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (a). This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight.

Handling Paper 111

Handling rolls

4.


After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display

Screen.

At this point, specify the paper type. (→P.105)

112 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Removing the Roll from the Printer

Remove rolls from the printer as follows.

Note

• If you need to cut a printed roll, select Paper Cutting in the printer menu and cut the roll at the desired position. (→P.122)

• If you have selected Media Menu > Chk Remain.Roll

> On in the printer menu, a barcode indicating the amount of paper left is printed on the leading edge of the roll. However, barcodes are not printed on some types of paper, and only a text message indicating media information is printed.

Caution

• If you have activated automatic monitoring of the remaining roll paper, do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed. You will be unable to keep track of the amount of roll paper left.

1.

Press the Load/Eject button.

A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the roll.

2.

Press the OK button.

The roll can now be removed.

Next, when removing rolls from the Roll Holder Slot, see “Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder

Slot”. (→P.114)

Handling Paper 113

Handling rolls

Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder Slot

Remove rolls from the Roll Holder Slot as follows.

Make sure the roll is away from the Paper Feed Slot, and then remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder

1.

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

2.

Remove the roll from the Roll Holder.

Important

• After removal, store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it again.

114 Handling Paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.

1.

Turn the printer off. (→P.22)

2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.

If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.

Handling rolls

Important

• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.


4.

Push the Release Lever back.

Handling Paper 115

Handling rolls

5.

Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.

Caution

• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury and damaging the printer.

6.

If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.

Important

• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer.

7.



Important


• The amount of paper pulled from the roll corresponds to the margin of the leading edge.

116 Handling Paper

8.


9.


The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.

Note

• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.

1.

Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.

2.

Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.

3.

Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu, and the edge will be cut.

Handling rolls

Handling Paper 117

Handling rolls

Feeding Roll Paper Manually

You can bring the printer ofine by pressing the Online button.

When the printer is ofine and roll paper is selected as the paper source, you can feed or retract the roll paper by pressing ▲ or ▼ .

Press ▲ to retract the roll paper manually.

Press ▼ to feed the roll paper manually.

If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for less than a second, the roll paper will move about 1 mm (0.04 in).

If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the paper will move until you release the button. Release the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.

.

118 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper

If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text is printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. If this function is activated and barcodes are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected when you load a roll. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.

Note

• If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. This is also the case when printing on 8-inch rolls or clear lm.

Important

• If the barcode is not detected when it is advanced, enter the type and length of paper on the Control

Panel.

• Barcodes are not cut off when Chk Remain.Roll

and Trim Edge First are both Off . To have the printer cut off barcodes automatically, on the Control Panel menu, set Chk Remain.Roll

to On . Otherwise cut off barcodes by using Paper Cutting in the Control Panel menu.

Follow these steps to activate detection of the remaining roll paper.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chk Remain.Roll

, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

Handling Paper 119

Handling rolls

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls

When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.

Windows

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box.

(→P.345)

2.

Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type .

3.

In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in

C Between Pages and D Between Scans in B Drying Time , and then click OK .

(→P.351)

120 Handling Paper

Mac OS X

1.

Choose Print in the application menu.

2.

Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type .

Handling rolls

3.

In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in

C Between Pages and D Between Scans in B Drying Time , and then click OK .

(→P.390)

Note

• By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.

• To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting

Mode to Eject in the printer menu.

(→P.122)

Handling Paper 121

Handling rolls

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.

Automatic

Cutting Method

The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter

Unit following printer driver settings.

Menu Settings

Cutting

Mode

Automatic

Driver Setting

Auto Cut Yes

Eject

(→P.123)

Eject Yes

Manual

(→P.124)

Choose this setting if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.

To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit, hold the

Stop button for a second or more.

Choose this setting when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit.

Cut each page from the roll using scissors.

For continuous printing (if you will cut each page later), in Auto Cut , select Yes , or select Print Cut Guideline .

(→P.329)

Manual NoYesPrint

Cut

Guideline

Paper

Cutting

(→P.125)

Choose this option if you want to cut pages by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual cutting after printing when the printer driver is congured to Auto Cut > No or Print Cut

Guideline .

Otherwise choose this option if you want to cut the roll edge after loading a roll.

Paper

Cutting

Yes NoPrint

Cut

Guideline

Note

• Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have specied Auto Cut > Yes in the printer driver.

• With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut.

Cut the roll manually in the following cases:

122 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject , and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

7.

As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold the Stop button for at least a second to cut the roll.

Handling Paper 123

Handling rolls

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit )

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual , and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

7.

Press the Online button.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

8.

Use scissors to cut the roll paper along the cut line.

9.


124 Handling Paper

10.


The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.

Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)

Handling rolls

1.

If the printer stops operating after printing, press the Online button. The printer goes ofine.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to feed the roll paper to the position for cutting.

3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting , and then press the ► button.

5.


After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.

Caution

• If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in some cases before cutting.

Handling Paper 125

Handling rolls

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically

If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll.

Trim Edge First offers the following options.

• Automatic

If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 3 mm (0.12 in) or more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge, and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 3 mm.

• Off

The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.

For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

• On

The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper

Reference Guide. (→P.96)

Note

• If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv.

to Loose for a higher skew detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.

126 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls

The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up this function to be activated for some types of paper.

When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.

Important

• Do not activate the function to reduce cutting dust for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.

• Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before borderless printing.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , and then press the OK button.

The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.

Handling Paper 127

Handling rolls

Roll Holder Set

A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment, and 3-Inch Paper

Core Attachment.

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, remove the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment from the Holder Stopper and then attach the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on both the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper.

To load a roll with a 2-inch paper core, remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment from both the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper and then attach the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Holder Stopper. (→P.129)

• Roll Holder Set RH4-32 (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)

128 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder

The following attachments are provided with the Roll Holder. Use the attachment that matches the size of the paper core of the roll you will use. The printer is delivered with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder.

Using the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side

No Attachment Needed 2-Inch Paper Core

Attachment

3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment #1

3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment #2

Installing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

When loading a roll with a 3-inch paper core, remove the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment from the Holder

Stopper and then attach the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on both the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper.

1.

Push the tips (a) of the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment in and remove the 2-Inch Paper Core

Attachment from the Holder Stopper.

2.

Align the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 with the holes (b) of the Roll Holder and insert it rmly.

3.

Align the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2 with the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert it rmly.

Handling Paper 129

Handling rolls

Installing the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment

When loading a roll with a 2-inch paper core, remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment from both the Roll

Holder and Holder Stopper and then attach the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Holder Stopper.

1.

Push the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 in and remove the 3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment from the Roll Holder.

2.

Push the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2 in and remove the 3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment from the Holder Stopper.

3.

Align the tips (a) of the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment with the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert it rmly.

130 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Handling sheets

Selecting the Paper Source

When advancing paper, press the Feeder Selection button and select the source.

You can determine the selected source by checking which lamp is lit-either the Roll Media lamp (a) or the

Cut Sheet lamp (b).

• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.

• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets.

Note

• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, a message is shown on the Display Screen, either Remove roll?

or Eject sheet?

when you press the Feeder Selection button.

When removing the paper, press the OK button.

• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

• If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.575)

• If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

• If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

• When in the process of loading paper

Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.

• When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks

Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.

• If the Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.

Handling Paper 131

Handling sheets

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)


Note

• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type , and then press the ► button.

4.


Note

• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96) Plain Paper is selected by factory default.

If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.



5.


132 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Loading the Sheet in the Printer

Note

• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.101) (→P.96)

• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

• Roll (→P.113) (→P.114)

• Sheet (→P.137)

• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.538)

• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load the paper.

1.

Remove the Roll Holder from the printer and remove Basket Fastener A (a) from the Stand

Stay (b).

Note

• If you print on a long sheet (longer than 914 mm [36 in]), the trailing edge may touch the oor and become dirty. Before loading long paper, remove the Roll Holder and spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor.

Handling Paper 133

Handling sheets

2.

Open the Top Cover and push the Release Lever back.

Important


3.

With a sheet lengthwise and printing-side up, insert it between the Platen (a) and the Paper

Retainer (b). Align the edges of the sheet as follows.

1.

Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line (c) at right.

2.

Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line (d), as shown.

When inserted, sheets are automatically held by suction against the Platen.

134 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Important

• Load a sheet so that it is parallel to the Paper Alignment Line (d). Loading paper askew will cause an error.

• Warped paper may rub against the Printhead. Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it.

• If the sides of the sheet are not perpendicular at the corners, the sheet may not be advanced straight.

Note

• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is open. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Set vacuum stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three settings are available.

• A sheet is held in place by vacuuming through holes on the Platen. Although the vacuuming may produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions, it does not indicate a problem. If the noise is distracting, try moving the paper over slightly to the left or right (up to 1 mm [0.039 in]) while keeping it parallel to the Paper Alignment Line.

4.

Lower the Release Lever toward the front and close the Top Cover.

The printer now starts feeding the paper. After the paper is advanced, the printer automatically goes online and starts printing.

If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. In this case, select the type of paper. (→P.132)

Handling Paper 135

Handling sheets

Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing

You will need to advance the paper manually to the starting position for printing after selecting the type of paper in the Control Panel menu when rolls or sheets are loaded in the following cases, which require a different paper feeding method than usual.

• Rolls

If you select a type of paper for which Width Detection is Off when Chk Remain.Roll

is also Off

• Sheets

If you select a type of paper for which Width Detection is Off

In these cases, printing starts from the position at which the paper has been loaded, so you must load the paper as far into the Paper Feed Slot as possible.

Manually advance paper as follows.

1.

When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue?

is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.

If you select Width Detection ON , change the Media Detailed Settings information for that paper and use the regular feeding method.

2.

Keeping the right edge of the sheet aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a) on the right side of the printer, load the sheet so that the near edge is aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the platen.

3.

Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.

4.

After a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.

136 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Removing the Sheet

1.

Press the Load/Eject button.

Note

• Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, press the Stop button to cancel printing, print job processing, or ink drying.

2.

Press the OK button to eject the paper.

The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.

3.

Holding the paper, push the Release Lever back and remove the sheet.

4.

Pull the Release Lever forward.

Handling Paper 137

Handling sheets

Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.

1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.


Important


4.


138 Handling Paper

5.

If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.

6.

If you cannot see the paper, remove the scrap from behind the printer.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

7.


Handling sheets

Important


8.


Handling Paper 139

Output Stacker

Output Stacker

Using the Output Stacker

The Output Stacker can be held at two positions, as shown.

• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker

Use position (1).

• When the Output Stacker is not used

Use position (2).

Important

• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.

• The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.

140 Handling Paper

Output Stacker

Use the Output Stacker in the normal position (a).

However, for some types of media, you can use the stacker in the position for easy removal (b). To switch the stacker to the position for easy removal, move the Support Rod to the position of (b). This position enables printed documents to be removed more easily.

For information on the position for easy removal, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

Handling Paper 141

Printing Photos and Images

Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Photos and Images

Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Setting optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Photo (from digital camera)

Poster (Graphic Image)

POP Ad

Scanned Image

Setting optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Settings optimized for printing posters mainly composed of photos.

Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.

Setting optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.

Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Draft

142 Working With Various Print Jobs


Caution

• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note

• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings .

• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )

For details on Advanced Settings , see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing”. (→P.180)

• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.146)

Working With Various Print Jobs 143


Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Setting optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Photo Setting optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Poster (Photos)

Poster (Text, Illustrations)

Scanned Image

Draft

Settings optimized for printing posters mainly composed of photos.

Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.

Setting optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.

Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Caution




Note




• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.146)

• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.148)



Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

• Document: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.


2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.343)

3.

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy

Photo Paper.

In the A Media Type , choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated

Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)

5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photos in the E Print Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings .


6.



7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click 10"x12" .

8.

Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.

Roll (254.0mm) , and then click OK .

10.

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.333)

11.

Conrm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.337)



Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

• Document: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper Type: Glossy Photo Paper

• Roll paper Width: 10 inches (254 mm)

1.

Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

2.

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12" .

4.

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5.


6.

Access the Main pane.



7.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy

Photo Paper.

Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo in the E Print Target list.

Note

• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and

Images (Windows, Mac OS X)”. (→P.144)

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set.

.

9.

Access the Page Setup pane.

10.

Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.



11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) .

Note

• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width , click L Printer Information on the Main pane and update the printer information.

12.

Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C

Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" .

13.


For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.379)

14.

Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.382)


Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise drawings from CAD applications.

Note

• In Windows, you can print highly precise drawings using the provided imagePROGRAF HDI Driver for

AutoCAD/AutoCAD LT.

For details on the HDI driver, see HDI Driver .

For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.154)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.156)



Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

CAD (Line Drawing)

Description

Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

CAD (Fast)

CAD (Monochrome Line Drawing )

(Windows)

CAD (B/W Line Drawing) (Mac OS 9)

CAD (High Accuracy)

Poster (Notice Announcement)

3D/GIS Map

Settings optimized for fast printing of CAD drawings.

Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Settings optimized for attractive printing of highly precise documents such as CAD drawings with smooth lines and small text.

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

Note




For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X)


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

CAD (Line Drawing)

Description

Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

CAD (Fast)

CAD (Monochrome Line Drawing )

CAD (High Accuracy)

Poster (Notice Announcement)

3D CAD, GIS

Settings optimized for fast printing of CAD drawings.

Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Settings optimized for attractive printing of highly precise documents such as CAD drawings with smooth lines and small text.

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

Note




For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.


• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.156)



Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

• Document: CAD drawing

• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.


2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.343)

3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) or CAD

(Monochrome Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.

Note


6.




7.

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3 .

8.


9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

10.



11.


Note

• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.337)



Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.


• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3 .

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) or CAD

(Monochrome Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.

Note


.



9.


10.


11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,

ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note




12.


Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3 .

13.



14.


Note




Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .

Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.

Note

• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print

Priority to Line Drawing/Text .

Color Compatibility

Color Setting Item

Color Setting

Color (CAD) 1

Color (CAD) 2

Color (CAD) 3

Color (CAD) 4

Color (CAD) 5

Color (CAD) 6

Description

Print in standard colors.

Print in brighter colors.

Print emulating the Canon BJ-W3000/W3050, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers.

Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers.

Print emulating the HP Designjet 1000, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.

Print emulating the HP Designjet 4000/4500, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers.

Important

• If you have selected Color (CAD) 3 , Color (CAD) 4 , Color (CAD) 5 , or Color (CAD) 6 , it is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the specied printer exactly.

For instructions on conguring Color Compatibility , refer to the following topics.

• Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) (→P.160)



Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .

Note

• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print

Priority to Line Drawing/Text .

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

3.

Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device Settings sheet.

4.

Click A Color Compatibility to display the Color Compatibility dialog box.



5.

Select the desired color settings in the A Color Compatibility list.

Note

• For details on color settings, see “Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings”. (→P.159)

For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.183)



HP-GL/2 Printing

This printer supports the original Canon GARO printer control language as well as HP-GL/2 and HP

RTL(*1) emulation.(*2) When printing from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in the application’s plotter output settings.

Note

• For instructions on conguring these settings, refer to the software documentation.

The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing depending on whether a GARO,

HP-GL/2, or HP RTL job is received. Congure the optional settings for HP-GL/2 emulation on the printer control panel. (→P.50)

This printer can emulate the following printers using HP-GL/2 emulation.

Emulated Printers

Canon

Hewlett-Packard

W3000 and W3050(*3)

Designjet 450c, Designjet 750c Plus, and Designjet 750c

*1: HP-GL/2: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language 2; HP RTL: Hewlett-Packard Raster Transfer Language

*2: It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly.

*3: Layout templates are not supported.


Printing Ofce Documents

Printing Ofce Documents

Printing Ofce Documents


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for ofce documents

Print Target

Ofce Document

Description

Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce documents such as handouts.

Note


• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing”. (→P.180)

For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.164)

• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.166)



Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.

• Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note


6.




7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

8.

Select sheets in the L Paper Source list.

9.



10.


Caution


Note




Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.

• Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in.])/Letter

1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Cut Sheet .

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note


.



9.


10.

Select sheets in the A Media Source list.

11.

Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .

12.



13.


Note



Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER

Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the following topic.

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.168)

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.170)

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.

1.

Register a hot folder on your computer.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy.

2.

Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer

Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.345)


2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.


3.

Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the

Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.

For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1.

Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2.

Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3.

Press Favorites , and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4.

Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specied for the folder.

Note

• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy .



Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)





1.



2.







1.

To display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app

icon after navigating to Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF in the Applications folder or click C Set in the Utility pane.

2.

In Enlarged Copy Settings , click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .





Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note

• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .


Adjusting Images

Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

Color Mode

Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.

The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Color Mode Description

Color Print in color.

Color Adjustment

You can adjust the color balance and color-matching method.

You can adjust the color balance.

Monochrome Print in grayscale.

Color (CAD) A color mode optimized for line drawings

(2D-CAD). Lines in red, yellow, and other colors are printed especially clearly.

Color (CAD) enables adjustment of color settings. (→P.159)



Monochrome (BK ink)

A color mode for printing line drawings.

Only Black ink is used.

Monochrome Bitmap Print in a color mode for CAD, using

Color Ink, with all non-white portions printed in black.

No color adjustment is supported.

Color Adjustment

You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Adjustment Item Description

Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan , Magenta , and Yellow .

Magenta

Yellow

Gray Tone

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Adjust gray tones to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black

(tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.

Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

172 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Matching

You can choose the color-matching mode and method.

By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images more closely.

Matching Mode Description Notes

Driver Matching

Mode

Color adjustment based on the original color prole of the printer driver

This is the default color-matching method. Normally, use Driver

Matching Mode .

ICC Matching

Mode

Color adjustment based on ICC color proles (an international standard) using the printer driver

You can select the printer prole in the Printer Prole Settings list.

Driver ICM Mode Color adjustment based on the standard Windows

ICM function. The printer driver adjusts the colors.

Host ICM Mode Color adjustment based on the standard Windows

ICM function. Windows adjusts the colors.

Available when using Windows

2000, Windows XP, Windows Server

2003, Windows Vista, or Windows

Server 2008.

ColorSync Color adjustment based on the standard Mac OS

ColorSync function. Mac OS adjusts the colors.

Available when using Mac OS X

10.2.8-10.4.

Off (No

Correction)

No color-matching Choose this option for color-matching by the software application or with your own color prole, when you want to disable color-matching by the printer driver.

Matching Method

Auto

Perceptual

Color-matching optimized for images, graphics, or text

Description

Color-matching optimized for photos. Print images with smooth gradations and colors closer to those as displayed on the screen.

Notes

The available options and their display order vary depending on your selection in Color-Matching

Mode, as well as the operating system.

Colorimetric

Colorimetric (No

Wht-pnt Corr)

Saturation

Color-matching with adjustment to remove color from white area. Colors in data are reproduced accurately.

Color-matching without white adjustment to reect the prole of original data. Colors in data are reproduced accurately. Without white adjustment, colors are added to white areas.

Color-matching optimized for graphics. This option emphasizes color saturation.

Note

• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.174)

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.177)

Enhanced Printing Options 173

Adjusting Images

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5.

Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6.

Click Color in the G Color Mode list.


7.

Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.

Adjusting Images

8.

On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


D Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

H Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

I Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.


J Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

9.

Close the Color Settings dialog box.

10.



Adjusting Images

11.

Conrm the settings of A Page Size , L Paper Source , and so on.

12.


Note



Adjusting Images

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1.


2.


3.

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4.


5.


6.


7.



Adjusting Images

8.


9.

Click Color in the H Color Mode list.

10.

Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.


Adjusting Images

11.

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


D Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

H Brightness

I Contrast

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.


J Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

12.

Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

13.


14.

Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size .

15.


Note



Adjusting Images

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

Advanced Settings

For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing.

Note

• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing application.

For details on Easy Settings , refer to the following topics.

• Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.144)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.153)

• Printing Ofce Documents (→P.163)

Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Print Priority (*1) Description

Image A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.

Line Drawing/Text Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing detailed text in printed documents.

However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.

Ofce Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics, such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.

*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.


Adjusting Images

Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Print Quality (*1) Description

Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.

Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in

“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Standard

Draft

Print Priority

Image

Image

Line Drawing/Text

Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.

Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.

Image


Ofce Document

Choose this setting to print faster.

Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when checking layouts.

Image


*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.

Color settings

Setting Item

Color Mode (*1)

Options

Color

Monochrome

Color (CAD)

Monochrome (BK ink)

Monochrome Bitmap

Color Adjustment Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Gray Tone

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Description

Choose whether to print in color or monochrome.

(→P.172)

You can adjust the levels of cyan, magenta, and yellow as well as the brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray tones.

If you choose Monochrome or Monochrome (BK ink) in Color Mode only Brightness and Contrast can be adjusted.

Image , Graphics , and Text are available as Object

Adjustment options. (In Windows and Mac OS X

10.5 only.)

Choose the color-matching mode. Other color-matching modes may be provided by the computer operating system, such as ICM and

ColorSync.

Color-Matching

Modes

Color-Matching

Method (*2)

Driver Matching Mode

ICC Matching Mode

Driver ICM Mode

Host ICM Mode

Off

Auto

Perceptual

Colorimetric

Saturation other

Choose the color-matching method. The available options vary depending on your selection in

“Color-Matching Mode.”

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.

*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.


Adjusting Images

Enhancing printing quality

Setting Item

Unidirectional Printing

Description

Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing results if lines are printed crooked or images are uneven. However, this takes more time than regular printing.

Thicken Fine Lines (Windows)

Thicken Fine Lines (Mac OS X)

Sharpen Text (*1)

Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD drawings or similar documents.

Choose this option to print intricate text more distinctly.

Reduce Print Unevenness (*2)

Economy Printing

Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.

When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing, but the quality is diminished.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

*1: Displayed in Windows and Mac OS X 10.5.

*2: Displayed in Mac OS X.

Note

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality , and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

• For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.183)

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.185)


Adjusting Images

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.

7.

Click High (1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note

• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

8.

Click Color (CAD) in the G Color Mode list.


Adjusting Images

9.

To adjust the color, click H Color Settings .

Note

• For instructions on adjusting color, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.172)

10.

Select the K Sharpen Text check box.

11.


12.

Conrm the settings of A Page Size , L Paper Source , and so on.

13.


Note



Adjusting Images

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Mac OS X)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.

1.

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



Adjusting Images

8.


9.

Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.

10.

Click High(1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note

• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

11.

Click Color (CAD) in the H Color Mode list.

12.

To adjust the color, click I Set .

Note

• For instructions on adjusting color, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.172)

13.



Adjusting Images

14.

Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size .

15.


Note



Choosing Paper for Printing

Choosing Paper for Printing

Choosing a Paper for Printing

Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.

Media type

The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.

Note

• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. For information about the Media Conguration

Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.

If the paper type is not listed for selection

If the type of paper loaded is not listed among the options for selection, try printing on Special 1, Special 2, and so on. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.

For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.

• Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.189)

• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.190)



Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)


Important

• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.

(→P.498)

(→P.497)

Note

• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the

Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.106)

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type , and then press the ► button.

4.


Note

• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)By factory default, Plain

Paper is selected.

• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.



5.




Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)


Note

• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type , and then press the ► button.

4.


Note

• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96) Plain Paper is selected by factory default.

If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.



5.




Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.

For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.





Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important


If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.

7.

In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.



8.

If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll

Paper Width .

Note

• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.




Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



8.



9.

In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.

10.

If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Media Source , make sure the size as selected in

Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size . If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source , make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width .

Note

• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width , click L Printer

Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note




Printing enlargements or reductions

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.197)

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.199)

Note

• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of

150 dpi or more at actual size.



Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6.


7.




8.


(420.0mm) .

9.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 .

10.

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11.

Select the D Fit Paper Size check box.

12.

Click ISO A3 in the G Paper Size list.

13.


Note




Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note





12.


Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .

13.

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14.

Make sure E Fit Media Size is selected.

15.

Click ISO A3 in the I Media Size list.

16.


Note




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width




Fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.203)

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.205)

Note





Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

• Document: Any type


• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


Note

• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

10.

Click E Fit Roll Paper Width .

Note

• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width , the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK .

• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11.


Note




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.



9.


10.


11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16 in. (406.4mm) .

Note




12.



13.


14.

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width .

15.


Note




Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value




Scaling

Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.209)

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.211)

Note





Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll


• Roll paperr width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Important

• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


8.


(420.0mm) .

9.


10.


11.

Click ISO A4 in the G Paper Size list.

12.

Click F Scaling and enter “120.”

Note

• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting G Print Centered on the Layout sheet.

13.


Note




Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS

X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



Important

• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note




12.



13.


14.

Click G Scaling and enter “120.”

Note

• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered check box.

15.


Note




Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER


For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the following topic.

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.214)

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.216)

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)





1.



2.







1.


2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.



3.

Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.



Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note

• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy .



Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)





1.



2.







1.

To display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app

icon after navigating to Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF in the Applications folder or click C Set in the Utility pane.

2.

In Enlarged Copy Settings , click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .





Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note

• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .


Printing at full size

Printing at full size

Printing on Oversized Paper

Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for a margin. (→P.79) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use an oversized paper size.

For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and cut away the excess margin.

Note

• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will not be printed.

Oversize

The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.

a. Regular paper size: Gray area not printed b. Page Size c. Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)

Important

• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin required by the printer.

• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size

• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size

• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing. (→P.101)



Note

• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized printing on sheets, choose Cut Sheet as the paper source.

• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and print on it.

• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper

Size . Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size.” (→P.261)

For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.220)

• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.222)



Printing at Full Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)


• Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

7.

In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series .

8.

Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

9.

Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.



10.


11.


(420.0mm) .

12.


Note


Note

• You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected

Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format

Oversize - xxxxxx .



Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize .

Note

• For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize.”

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note




12.

Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page

Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize .

13.


Note




Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper


• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

1.

On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type .

2.

Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time .

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.



Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

• Not all page sizes are available.

• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.227)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.229)



Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper


1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note

• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight

Coated Paper.

6.




7.


8.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.

In this case, click 10"x12" .

9.


10.

Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll

(254.0mm) .

12.

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13.

In C Borderless Printing Method , click F Print Image with Actual Size .

14.


Note




Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)



• Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless .

Note

• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”

4.


5.

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

6.


7.


8.


Coated Paper.

9.




10.


11.


12.

Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.


Note




13.


Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless .

14.


Note



Borderless Printing


Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size




Important









1.


2.





Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

Borderless Printing

Note

• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.234)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.236)


Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the

Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


Note


2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



7.


Borderless Printing

8.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click 10"x12" .

9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm) .

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method , click D Fit Paper Size .

14.

Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

15.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the

Paper Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12" .

Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Coated Paper.


9.


10.


Borderless Printing

11.


12.


Note



Borderless Printing

13.


Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" .

14.

On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

15.

Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

16.

Click E Fit Media Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing .

17.

In I Media Size , click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless .

18.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll

Width




Important









1.


2.





Borderless Printing

Scale to t Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note

• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width

(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.241)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.243)


Borderless Printing


Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


Note


2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



Borderless Printing

7.


8.


9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm) .

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method , make sure E Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.

14.


Note



Borderless Printing


Width (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Coated Paper.

9.



Borderless Printing

10.


11.


12.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, 10 in. (254.0mm) .

Note



Borderless Printing

13.



14.


15.

Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced

Printing .

16.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size




Important









1.


2.





Borderless Printing

Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

• Not all page sizes are available.

• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.


• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.248)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.250)


Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)




• Paper: Roll



1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note


• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



7.


Borderless Printing

8.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.

In this case, click 10"x12" .

9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm) .

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method , click F Print Image with Actual Size .

14.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)



• Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless .

Note

• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Coated Paper.

9.



Borderless Printing

10.


11.


12.

Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.


Note



Borderless Printing

13.


Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless .

14.


Note



Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format

Printing)

You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.

Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.

Fit Roll Paper Width

You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the full width of rolls.

Note

• The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd (when printing in Mac OS X).

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.254)

• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.258)

Important

• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.

• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.




Printing; Windows)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

• Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word

• Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll


• Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

Register a Custom Paper Size .

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Paper Size . In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

2.

In the application, create an original in the size you registered.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Paper Size

This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.

6.

In Units , click mm .

7.

Under Paper Size , enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height .

8.

Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”

9.




10.

Close the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not available after you exit the application.

For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.262)

Creating the banner in the application

Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.

1.

Start Microsoft Word.

2.

Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.

3.

Under Paper Size , click the Custom Paper Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this example.

Important

• If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.

• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)

4.

Set the printing orientation to horizontal.

5.

Create the banner.

Printing the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.

Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.

2.


3.


4.


5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the

E Print Target list.



6.


7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner."

8.


Note

• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

9.


10.

After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width , the Information dialog box is displayed.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll

(406.4mm) , and then click OK .



12.


Note


Note

• If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1.

On the Layout sheet, click M Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2.

In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes .




Printing; Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

• Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

• Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll



Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

Register a “Custom Page Size.”

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup . In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

Register a Custom Page Size

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

Create the document in the application.

2.


3.


4.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

5.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter “100*500.”

If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.

6.

Under Page Size , enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height . Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

7.

Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins . Here, too, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.



9.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size you registered.

10.

In D Orientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

11.


Print the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.


2.


3.


4.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the E Print Target list.

5.


6.




7.


Note


8.

In C Page Size , make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup .

9.


10.

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width .

11.

Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.

Note




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.

There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver

After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose them anytime as needed.

Note

• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Paper Sizes in

Windows and “Custom Sizes” in Mac OS X.

Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use

Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.

Note

• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.262)

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.266)



Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.

• Printing by using Custom Size (→P.262)

• Printing by using Custom Paper Size (→P.264)

Printing by using Custom Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.

• Document: Scanned image

• Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1.

Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target list.



7.


8.

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

9.

Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

10.

Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

1.

Select mm or inch in Units .

2.

Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height .

11.

Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

12.


Note




Printing by using Custom Paper Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example. First, register a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Paper Size .


• Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


8.


9.

Complete the following settings in the Paper Size Options dialog box.

1.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . “430 mm Square” is used in this example.

2.

Select mm or inch in Units .

3.

Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height .

Note

• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either

Width or Height , the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.

10.

Click Add to register “430 mm Square.”

11.


12.


13.

In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square."

14.


Note




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.


• Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets



Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

Create the document in the application.

2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

6.

In Page Size , enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and

Width .

7.

In Printer Margins , enter “0.3” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.

Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name-in this case, “430*430”.

9.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

10.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size you registered.

11.


12.



13.



14.


15.


16.


17.

Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.

18.

In D Easy Settings , make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup .

19.


Note



Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.

Free Layout (Windows)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.



imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.

Important

• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.270)

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.272)



Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

5.

Select the A Page Layout check box.

6.

Click Free Layout in the B Page Layout list.



7.

When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

9.

Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .



Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout .

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.

4.

Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free

Layout help topic.



5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .



Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Roll paper (banner)

Important

• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.


• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.275)

• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.277)



Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important



1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

5.


6.




7.

Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

8.

Select the B Banner Printing check box.

9.

Click OK .

10.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important



1.


2.


3.

Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4.


5.

In the source application menu, choose Print .

6.


7.

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

8.

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.



9.


10.

Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Media Source list.

11.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.

Page Layout

Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.

Note

• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.

• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

Important

• This function cannot be combined with the following options.

• Borderless Printing

• Resizing to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

• Scaling Originals (Windows)

• Banner Printing (Windows)

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.280)

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.282)



Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.


• Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

8.




9.


(420.0mm) .

10.


11.


12.

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the B Page Layout list.

Note

• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page

Layout Printing dialog box by clicking C Set .

13.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.


• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Access the Layout pane.

7.

Click 4.0

in the A Pages per Sheet list.

Note

• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout

Direction and C Border (or Border ).


8.



9.


10.


11.


12.




13.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note


14.


Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3 .

15.


Note




Printing Posters in Sections

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

Page Layout

Choose poster printing.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.286)

Note

• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.



Printing Large Posters (Windows)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

• Document: Poster

• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Sheets ( Cut Sheet )

• Paper Type: Glossy Paper

• Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.

5.

Click Poster (Photos) or Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the E Print Target list.

6.


7.

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click

ISO A2 .


8.


9.



10.


11.

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the B Page Layout list.

Note

• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.

1.

Click C Set under B Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.

2.

On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.

3.

Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12.


Note



Centering originals

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

When using originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.289)

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.291)


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll


• Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Centering originals

9.


(297.0mm) .

10.


11.

Select the G Print Centered check box.

12.


Note



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.

Select the print target in the B Format for list.

3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Centering originals

9.


10.


11.


10-in. Roll .

Note



Centering originals

12.



13.

Select the J Print Centered check box.

14.


Note



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

When you print originals that are smaller than the sheet size, the originals are arranged in the upper left corner of the sheet. If you prefer, you can print originals that were arranged this way centered on the sheet instead.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.295)

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.297)


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.



• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Centering originals

9.

Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

10.

Click F Scaling and enter “50.”

11.


12.


13.

Select the G Print Centered check box.

14.


Note


Important

• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4/Letter

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: Non-standard

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the application software menu, choose Print .

5.


6.


7.



Centering originals

8.


9.

Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.

10.


Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 .

11.

Select the J Print Centered check box.

12.


Note


Important

• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.


Conserving roll paper

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important

• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll

Paper Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.300)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.302)




(Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.




6.


7.


8.


(297.0mm) .

9.

Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.

10.


Note





(Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.


• Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO

A3/A4 (297.0mm) .

Note




11.



12.

Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

13.


Note




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

Important

• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.

• Banner printing

• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note

• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.

• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.306)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.308)



Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


(297.0mm) .

9.


10.

Select the I No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.

11.


Note




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.

Select the print target in the B Format for list.

3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO

A3/A4 (297.0mm) .

Note




11.



12.

Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

13.


Note



Checking Images Before Printing

Checking Images Before Printing

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

You can check the print layout on the preview screen.

Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

Note

• Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.



Preview (Macintosh)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

Important

• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:

• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) (→P.313)

• Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.315)




(Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5.

After you click OK , when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

Note

• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Preview Switching .



6.

On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.

7.

To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .



Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview .

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

4.

Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview .


Other useful settings

Other useful settings

Printing With Watermarks

You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

Watermark

Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.

Important

• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

The following watermarks are provided:

• CONFIDENTIAL

• COPY

• DRAFT

• FILE COPY

• FINAL

• PRELIMINARY

• PROOF

• TOP SECRET

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.

• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.

• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.

• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.

Note

• Watermarks are supported in Windows.

• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:

• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.317)



Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on

(Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on the following example.


• Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print

Target list.

Note




6.


7.

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

8.


9.


(420.0mm) .

10.


11.

Select the D Watermark check box.

12.

Click FILE COPY in the E Watermarks list.

Note

• To create your own, original watermark, click F Edit Watermark . Refer to the printer driver help for instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.

13.


Note




Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation

You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.

Orientation

Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

Rotate 180 degrees

The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

Mirror

A mirror image of the original is printed.

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.320)

• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.322)




Orientation (Windows)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

• Document: An original in landscape orientation


• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.

In H Orientation , click J Landscape .

9.


10.


(420.0mm) .

11.


Note





Orientation (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

• Document: An original in landscape orientation


• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4.

In D Orientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

5.


6.


7.


8.


9.




10.


11.


12.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) .

Note




13.



14.


Note




Using Favorites

You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

Favorites

Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you can check the settings details.

Note

• You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.326)

• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.328)



Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5.

Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6.

Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.

• Enter a desired name in Name , such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

• In Comment , enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

7.

Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites .

Note

• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.



Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Favorites , choose the favorite you registered.

Note

• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.

5.

Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.


Note




Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.



Cutting Roll Paper After Printing

Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.

Note

• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.96)

Automatic Cutting

Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.330)

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.331)



Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.

Note

• Auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function after it is disabled, or to change the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click N Auto Cut to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

6.

To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .

7.

Click OK to close the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

8.


Note


Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.



Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.

Note

• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a cut guideline instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.

Click C Set to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

11.

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .

Important

• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12.

Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

13.


Note



Windows Software

Printer Driver

Printer Driver Settings (Windows)

For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.343)

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.345)

For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

Printer Driver

• Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.347)

You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings.

Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced

Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

• Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.351)

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.352)

• Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.353)

• Matching Sheet (Windows) (→P.355)

• Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.357)

• Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.359)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.

• Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.361)

• Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.362)

You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.

• Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.364)

• Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.365)

• Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.366)

Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.

Windows Software 333

Printer Driver

• Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.368)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .

• Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.369)

You can view support information and the user manual.

• Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.370)

You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout .

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER . For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .

334 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)


Important


If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.

7.

In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.


Printer Driver

8.

If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll

Paper Width .

Note




Printer Driver

Conrming Print Settings (Windows)

There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.

• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.337)

• Checking a print preview (→P.338)

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main , Page Setup , and Layout sheets. By checking illustrations and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.

Display Area

P Top illustrations

Q Middle, bordered area

R Bottom illustrations

Information Displayed

Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are indicated.

Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

Note

• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings , click F View Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box.


Printer Driver

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing.

Conrming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.311)


Printer Driver


(Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5.

After you click OK , when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

Note

• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Preview Switching .


Printer Driver

6.

On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.

7.

To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .


Printer Driver

Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.


5.

Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6.

Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.

• Enter a desired name in Name , such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

• In Comment , enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

7.

Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites .

Note

• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.


Printer Driver

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Favorites , choose the favorite you registered.

Note

• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.

5.

Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.


Note



Printer Driver

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Windows)

1.

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences .

■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main , Page Setup , Layout ,

Favorites , Utility , and Support .

Note

• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.


Printer Driver

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.345)


Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows)

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

Printer Driver

3.

Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note

• The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (→P.370)


Printer Driver

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main , Page Setup , Layout ,

Favorites , Utility , and Support .

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.343)


Printer Driver

Main Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help le.

Note

• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Conguration using Easy Settings

Setting Item

A Media Type

Description

Select the type of paper.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper


B Get Information Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows the types and sizes of paper specied on the printer for each feed source.

When you select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the feed source, type of paper, and roll width.

C Advanced Settings Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.

E Print Target Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.144)

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.153)

Printing Ofce Documents (→P.163)

Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

F View Settings Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target .

L Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.311)


Printer Driver

Setting Item

M Status Monitor

N About

S Defaults

Description

Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help le.

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Conguration using Advanced Settings

Setting Item

A Media Type

Description

Select the type of paper.



B Get Information

C Advanced Settings Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.

E Print Priority Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

(→P.180)

F Print Quality

Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows the types and sizes of paper specied on the printer for each feed source.

When you select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the feed source, type of paper, and roll width.

Choose the level of print quality.


(→P.180)

G Color Mode Choose the color mode.


(→P.180)

Depending on the Media Type setting, some Color Mode options may not be available.

H Color Settings Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.172)


Printer Driver

K

T

Setting Item

I Thicken Fine Lines

J Unidirectional Printing

Sharpen Text

Economy Printing

Description

Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.

Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

Activate this option to print text more sharply.

When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing, but the quality is diminished.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

L Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.311)

M Status Monitor Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help le.

N About

S Defaults

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.



Printer Driver

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.

Note

• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by

Media Type . (→P.347)

Setting Item Description

A Paper Source Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the Paper Source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK .


Printer Driver

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media

Type . (→P.347)


A Media Type Select the paper type.



B Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying

Time setting is only valid for rolls.

(→P.120)

C Between Pages Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

D Between Scans Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

E Roll Paper Margin for

Safety

F Near End Margin

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

G Cut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

I Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.


Printer Driver

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Windows)

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target .

(→P.347)


A Print Target Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name

C Details

Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target .


Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

Printer Driver

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in

Advanced Settings . (→P.347)


A Sample Type Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or

Graphics .

B View Color Pattern

C Apply to Sample

Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.

Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the sample image.

D Cyan

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone

Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).

H Brightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

J Saturation Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.


Printer Driver

Setting Item

K Object Adjustment

S Defaults

Description

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.


Note

• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.172)

Object Adjustment dialog box

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.


A Image Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.


Printer Driver

Matching Sheet (Windows)

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Driver Matching Mode

The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the Matching Mode list.

Note

• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced

Settings , and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.347)


A Matching Mode Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on

ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode , Driver ICM Mode , or Host ICM

Mode , depending on your color matching system. If you prefer not to use the printer driver for color matching, select No .

B Matching Method Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.

Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching .

Note



Printer Driver

ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode , Driver

ICM Mode , or Host ICM Mode on the Matching Mode sheet.

Note

• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced

Settings , and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.347)



B Input Prole Settings You can select Image , Graphics , or Text . You can choose Matching

Method and Input Prole .

Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .

To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text , select

Use the Same Prole for All Objects . To apply separate input proles to Graphics and Text , clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and specify the individual settings.

C Printer Prole Settings Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings .

Note



Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)

On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Printer Driver

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in



A Sample Type Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or

Graphics .

B View Color Pattern

C Apply to Sample

Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.

Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the sample image.

D Cyan

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone

H Brightness

Not available.

Not available.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

J Saturation

K Object Adjustment

Not available.

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

S Defaults Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.


Printer Driver

Note


Object Adjustment dialog box

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.


A Image Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.


Printer Driver

Page Setup Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help le.

Setting Item

A Page Size

B Borderless Printing

Description

Select the page size as specied in the source application.

For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.101)

Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the L

Paper Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.232)

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

(→P.239)

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.225)

D Fit Paper Size

E Scale to t Roll Paper

Width

F Print Image with Actual

Size

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

G Paper Size

Available when Fit Paper Size is selected.

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.101)

Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

C Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the A Page Size list.

Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.196)

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.202)

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.208)


Printer Driver

Setting Item

D Fit Paper Size

E Fit Roll Paper Width

F Scaling

G Paper Size

H Orientation

K Rotate Page 90 degrees

(Conserve Paper)

L Paper Source

M Roll Paper Width

N Roll Paper Options

Description

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value.

Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.


Choose the printing orientation.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation

(→P.319)

Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.299)

Choose the feed source, as desired.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in

Media Type on the Main sheet.

Choose the roll width.

For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.101)

Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper

Options dialog box.

P Output Method

O Size Options

S Defaults

Under A Automatic Cutting , you can specify Yes or No and Print

Cut Guideline .

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.329)

Select B Banner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (→P.274)

Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings.

Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.


Printer Driver

Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)

In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size . The sizes you dene are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.

Note

• To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options .

(→P.359)


A Paper Size List Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

B Delete Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the Paper Size

List , as needed.

However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.

• If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.

• If an oversized paper size is selected.

• If a paper size in a red box is selected.

C Custom Paper Size Name You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.

D Units Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.

E Paper Size Specify the desired Width and Height . You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting

Borderless Printing Size . To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and

Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to

Height .

F Add Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specied or overwrite an existing custom paper size.

G Display Series You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size , Paper Size , and

Paper Size List .


Printer Driver

Layout Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help le.

Setting Item

A Page Layout

Description

Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.279)

Printing Posters in Sections (→P.285)

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.268)

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.374)

D

C Set

Watermark

Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in A Page Layout . In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.

• Page Layout Printing

• Pages to Print

• Free Layout Settings

Activating this option makes two settings available, E Watermarks and F

Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks (→P.316)

E Watermarks Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

F Edit Watermark Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

G Print Centered Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.288)

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.294)

H Rotate 180 degrees

I No Spaces at Top or

Bottom (Conserve Paper)

Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

(→P.305)

J Copies Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”

Reverse Order Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.


Setting Item

K Page Options

M Special Settings

S Defaults

Printer Driver

Description

Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name, date, or page number in the header or footer.

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.



Printer Driver

Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)

The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.

Note

• To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options . (→P.362)


A Print Date Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select

B Print Time Also .

C Print User Name Select where the user name is printed, as desired.

D Print Page Number

E Format Settings

Select where the page number is printed, as desired.

Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.

Note

• If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order: date, user name, and page number.

• When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items will be printed for each page.


Printer Driver

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special

Settings dialog box.

Note

• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings . (→P.362)


A FineZoom Settings This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto . If documents are not printed correctly on large-format paper, it may help to select Yes , and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed, it may help to select No .

B Application Color Matching

Priority

You can give applications priority in color management.

C Enable Preview Switching Selecting this option will start PageComposer if you print when Open

Preview When Print Job Starts is selected on the Main sheet.

D Fast Graphic Process If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

E Reduce Print Unevenness If you are concerned about uneven colors, selecting this option may improve printing results. However, printing may take longer for some images.

F Adjust faint lines If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other shapes, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

However, lines in some colors may appear broken.


Printer Driver

Favorites Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

F Delete

G Edit

H Add

Setting Item

A Favorites

B Settings Details

C Comment

Description

Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.

Using Favorites (→P.325)

Displays details of the favorite selected in the

Displays notes registered in the favorite.

D Apply Favorite Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the A Favorites .

E Application Settings Priority Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A

Favorites , when clicking D Apply Favorite . For details on the settings items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.

Click to delete the selected favorite from the name and icon for the favorite selected in the

A Favorites .

A Favorites list.

Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the

A Favorites list.

Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

I Import

J Export


Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a le.

Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a le.

K Up

L Down

Setting Item

Printer Driver

Description

Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.

Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.


Printer Driver

Utility Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

Button

A Maintenance

B Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy

Corresponding Utility

Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

• Head alignment adjustment

• Feed amount adjustment

Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

(Windows) (→P.168)

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .


Support Sheet (Windows)

On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

Printer Driver

Button

A Support Information

B User Manual

C Settings Summaries


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the Main , Page Setup , Layout , and Favorites sheets.


Printer Driver

Device Settings Sheet (Windows)

Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the

Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.

The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

Setting Item

A Color Compatibility

Description

Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to adjust colors if you have selected Color Mode > Color (CAD) .

B About Displays version information for the printer driver.


Printer Driver

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)

The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main , Page Setup , Layout , and Favorites sheets.

A Copy

Button Corresponding Utility

Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a le created with a text editor or similar application.


Status Monitor

Status Monitor

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and

“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.

• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.

• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

• Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low.

• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has run out.

• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal printing results.

• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

Note

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.


Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image

les on your computer with various other applications.

• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.

• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.

• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment.

• Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it can save time and work in retouching.

Note

• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.


PosterArtist

PosterArtist

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.

Important

• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

Edit Using PosterArtist

PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and compose an original with them.

Important

• This function is only supported in Windows.

For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:

• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.375)


PosterArtist

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)

This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout for printing.

Important

• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the B Page Layout list.

7.

When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.


PosterArtist

9.

Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

10.

Print from the PosterArtist menu.


Device Setup Utility

Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.

• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.

• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your computer and these printers is possible.

Note

• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software .

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.


Device Setup Utility

Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF


From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator” account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.

• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility”. (→P.377)

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2.

In the Product Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.

3.

Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4.

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual .

5.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

6.

Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.

7.

Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP , BOOTP , or RARP .

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.


Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.386)

Printer Driver

For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.387)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

• Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.390)

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.391)

• Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P.392)

• Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.394)

• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.395)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.

• Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.397)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .

• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.398)

You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.

• Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.399)

You can view support information and the user’s manual.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a single page before printing. For details, see Free Layout .

With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see Preview .

With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER . For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .

Mac OS X Software 379

Printer Driver

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


380 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

8.


9.

In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.

10.

If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Media Source , make sure the size as selected in

Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size . If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source , make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width .

Note



Note




Printer Driver

Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.

• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.382)

• Checking a print preview (→P.383)

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main , Page Setup , Utility , and Additional

Settings panes.By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper source, and so on.

Display Area

Pane displayed when the H Images tab is clicked

Information Displayed

On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Paper size details are indicated numerically.

Pane displayed when the clicked

I Size tab is

Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the paper source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.


Printer Driver

Note

• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings , click F View set.

on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.311)


Printer Driver

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview .

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

4.

Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview .


Printer Driver

Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.


Printer Driver

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Mac OS X)

1.


Note

• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3.

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.


Printer Driver

Main Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Conguration using Easy Settings

A Media Type

E

L

B Get Information

C

Setting Item

Set

Print Target

F View set.

Printer

Description

Select the paper type.



Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.


Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.144)

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.153)

Printing Ofce Documents (→P.163)

Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target .

Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.


Printer Driver

Conguration using Advanced Settings

Setting Item

A Media Type

Description




E

B Get

Information

C Set

Print Priority

Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P.180)

F Print Quality Choose the level of print quality.


H Color Mode Choose the color mode.


I Set Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.172)

J Unidirectional

Printing

K Reduce Print

Unevenness

Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

This option is displayed if you have selected Plain Paper in A Media Type and

Ofce Document in E Print Priority .

Activate this option for two-pass printing to reduce color shading.

N Economy Printing When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing, but the quality is diminished.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example.

Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

L Printer Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.


Printer Driver

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver media type setting.

Note

• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by

Media Type . (→P.387)


A Paper Source Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK .


Printer Driver

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Settings by Media

Type . (→P.387)


A Media Type Select the paper type.



B Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying

Time setting is only valid for rolls.

(→P.120)

C Between Pages Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

D Between Scans

E

G

H

J

Roll Paper Margin for

Safety

F Near End Margin

Cut Speed

Automatic Cutting

Mirror

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No , or Print Cut Guideline .

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.


Printer Driver

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Mac OS X)

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click View Settings by Print Target .

(→P.387)


A Print Target Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name

C Details

Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.


Printer Driver

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)

In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.

However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in



A Preview The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B Original The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image

(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

G Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

H Saturation Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

I Gray Tone Adjustment Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.


Printer Driver

Note


Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced

Settings , and then click Matching . (→P.387)



B Matching Method Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various

Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in

Matching .

Note



Printer Driver

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings .

(→P.387)


A Preview The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B Original The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Not available.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

G Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

H Saturation

I Gray Tone

Not available.

Not available.

Note



Printer Driver

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A Media Source

Description

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media

Type in the Main pane.

B Roll Paper Width Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.

Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

C Page Size Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the application.

For details on page sizes available in the application.see “Paper Sizes”.

(→P.101)

D Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.196)

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.202)

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.208)

E Fit Media Size Resizes the document image to match the paper size.

F Fit Roll Paper Width Resizes the document image to match the roll width.

G Scaling Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

H Borderless Printing Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the

Source list.

A Media

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.232)

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.239)

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.225)

I Media Size Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

Click Display all selections for Paper Size to list available sizes.



Printer Driver

Setting Item

J Print Centered

Description

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.288)

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.294)

K No Spaces at Top or

Bottom

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom

Margins (→P.305)

L Rotate Page 90 degrees Activate this setting to rotate the original 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.299)


Utility Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Utility pane.

Printer Driver

A

B

C

Set

View

Set


Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

• Head alignment adjustment

• Feed amount adjustment

Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , which enables you to view the status of print jobs.

Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

(iR enlargement copy).

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .


Printer Driver

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.

Setting Item

A Data Send Method

Description

Choose how print data is sent to the printer.

•

•

B

C

Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer

D Send job to Click to display the Send job to dialog box, which enables you to specify how print jobs are stored on the printer’s hard disk.

•

•

•

E

F

G

Print

Print (auto delete)

Save in mail box

H Save data before printing Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk.


Support Pane (Mac OS X)

On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

Printer Driver

Button

A Support Information

B User Manual

C Settings

D About


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box, which enables you to specify where to save the le.

You can display version information for the printer driver.


Printmonitor

Printmonitor

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

• You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.

• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

Note

• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.

After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.

4.

Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the

Search button.

Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

5.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.

After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.


Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Environment

System requirements

The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.

• Printing over a TCP/IP network

• Compatible operating systems


• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

• Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)

• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later

• Compatible computer

• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

• Printing over an AppleTalk network

• Compatible operating systems

• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later



Note

• The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.

• Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.

• Printing over a NetWare network

• Compatible servers

• Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0

• Compatible clients


• Windows XP (Professional)



Note

• In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.

Network Setting

Network Setting 401

Network Setting

Network environment

After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers as needed.

• Example of a Windows network

In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.

Note

• NetBIOS is not supported.

• Example of a Macintosh network

In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour(Zeroconf) functions.

• Example of a NetWare network

Note

• Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.

In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.

402 Network Setting

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address on the Printer

You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.

The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the Quick Start Guide.

Congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or

PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.

• Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (→P.404)

• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.405)

• Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.406)

Important

• If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer’s IP address, printing may no longer be possible after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned. Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and congure the settings in one of the following ways.

• Congure the setting for dynamic DNS updating

In RemoteUI, activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update . (→P.408)

• Congure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up

Note

• We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other than TCP/IP networks. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.

For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.407)

Network Setting 403

Network Setting




Important




1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


Note




404 Network Setting

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel

This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address , and then press the ► button.

6.

After pressing ◄ or ► to select the input eld, press the OK button to enable numerical input.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is “255,” after which “0” is displayed.

• Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is “0,” after which “255” is displayed.

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

8.

Repeat steps 3-4 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.

9.


If any of the settings are changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Important

• Be sure to complete step 9. This will activate the values you have entered.

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.

Note

• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Network Setting 405

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands

This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.

To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel.

1.

Check the printer’s MAC address.

You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address , and then press the ► button.

Note

• You can investigate the MAC address by printing a Status Print report.

(→P.67)

2.

In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.

3.

Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.

arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]

Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx

Note

• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

00:00:85:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

4.

Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.

ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479

Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479

Note

• In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.

• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

Note

• The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0.” Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gateway to match your network settings.


406 Network Setting

Network Setting

Using RemoteUI

Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network settings.

To access RemoteUI, start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://“printer IP address or name”/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.

• Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.408)

• Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.410)

• Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.411)

• Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.413)

Note

• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status information, and cancel print jobs.

• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. To change the display language, select the desired language under Language before logging on in administrator mode.

Important

• Use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.

• Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)

• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.

• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly congured.

Network Setting 407

Network Setting

Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.

1.

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.



2.

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

3.

If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4.

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

RAW Printing

Item Details

Activate this setting to use DHCP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use

BOOTP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use RARP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Enable DNS Dynamic Update Activate this setting to perform

DNS server registration automatically.

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address

Off


Bonjour.

On

Specify the printer’s IP address.

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0

Specify the printer’s default gateway.

0.0.0.0

On Activate this setting to use LDP

Printing.

Activate this setting to use IPP

Printing.

On

IPP Printer URI Specify the URI of the printer used for IPP printing using up to

252 characters.

When using a standard Windows port for IPP printing, enter an

URL less than 255 bytes for all characters for “http://"IP address"/IPP-URI.”

Activate this setting to use Raw

Printing.

printer

On

Default Setting

408 Network Setting

Network Setting

Item

RAW Mode Bi-direction

FTP Printing

SMTP Server Address

Details


Raw mode bidirectional communication.

Activate this setting to use FTP

Printing.

Specify the SMTP server’s IP address.

Off

On

0.0.0.0

Default Setting

Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

DNS Host Name

DNS Domain Name

Multicast DNS Service Name

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1-63 characters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and “-”

(hyphens). Do not use numbers or “-” for the rst character or “-” for the last character.

NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx

Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters, numbers, “-”

(hyphens), and “.” (periods). Do not use numbers, “-”, or “.” for the

rst character, or “-” or “.” for the last character.

blank

Specify the printer’s Multicast

DNS service name. (1-63 characters)

This name will be displayed when

Bonjour functions are used.

Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)

7.

Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such protocol running in the network.

• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.

• It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use.

• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address , Secondary DNS

Server Address , DNS Host Name , and DNS Domain Name , respectively.

Network Setting 409

Network Setting

Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk

Protocol Settings page.

6.

Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

Item

Phase Type

Name (*1)

Zone (*2)

Details

Specify whether to use AppleTalk.

If you will use AppleTalk, choose

Phase 2 .

If you will not use AppleTalk, choose Disabled .

Disabled

Default Setting

Specify the object name used by

AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte or 15 double-byte characters).

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ * : =

Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)

Specify the printer zone name, up to 31 single-byte characters.

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ : = Also avoid using “*” (which represents the default zone) in the middle of a string.

*

*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer.

By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.

Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7.


410 Network Setting

Network Setting

Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

Item

Frame Type

NCP Burst Mode

Print Application

Packet Signature

Bindery

PServer

File Server Name

Print Server Name

Print Server Password

Polling Interval

RPrinter Print Server Name

Details

Specify the type of frame to use in NetWare.


NCP Burst Mode.

This mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, leave the setting On.

On

Default Setting

Disabled


• Bindery PServer

• RPrinter

• NDS PServer

• NPrinter

NDS PServer

Select If Requested by Server to use packet signature.

If Requested by Server

Specify the name of a le server that has a NetWare print server.

(0-47 characters)

-

Specify the name of a NetWare print server.

(0-47 characters)

-

Set a password for the print server.

(0-20 characters)

Specify the interval to conrm jobs.

(1-15 seconds)


(0-47 characters)

-

-

5

Network Setting 411

Network Setting

NDS

PServer

Item

Printer Number

Tree Name

Context Name




NPrinter Print Server Name

Printer Number

7.


Details

Specify the number of the printer connected to the

NetWare print server.

(0-15)

Specify the name of an NDS tree that has a NetWare print server.

(0-32 characters)

-

0

Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server.

(0-255 characters)

-


(0-64 characters)

-


(0-20 characters)

-


(1-255 seconds)


(0-47 characters)

-



(0-254)

5

0

Default Setting

412 Network Setting

Network Setting

Specifying Printer-Related Information

Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.

Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.

5.

To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information or Security , depending on what information you want to specify.

6.

Refer to the table of settings for device information, security, and email notication as you complete these settings.

Device Information Settings

Item

Device Name

Location

Administrator

Phone

Comments(E-mail)

Details

Enter a device name.

(0-32 characters)

Enter the location where the device is installed.

(0-32 characters)

Enter the administrator’s name.

(0-32 characters)

Enter the administrator’s contact information.

(0-32 characters)

Default Setting blank blank blank blank

Enter any comments regarding the administrator.

(0-32 characters) blank

Security Settings

Item

Old Password

New Password

Conrm

Details

Enter the current device password.

(0-14 characters)

Enter the new password.

(0-14 characters)

Enter the new password again to conrm it.

(0-14 characters)

Default Setting blank blank blank

Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as IP address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or

IPP and FTP authentication settings.

7.

Click OK to activate the settings.

Network Setting 413

Network Setting

Conguring the Communication Mode Manually

This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press ► .

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver , and then press ► .

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect , and then press ► .

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off , and then press OK .

Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode

, and then press ► .

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type , and then press ► .

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press OK .


10.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree , and then press ► .

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press OK .


12.


After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK .

The printer will now restart.

414 Network Setting

Network Setting

Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors

Occur

The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.

Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.

Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,see “Specifying

Printer-Related Information”. (→P.413)

Note

• For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Network Setting 415

Network Setting

Initializing the Network Settings

Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.

Important

• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

• For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.

(→P.403)

• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.407)

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.

6.

After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Note

• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.

• If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN

MENU , and then press ▲ , ▼ , and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →

Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.

416 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Network Setting (Windows)

Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

The procedure described below is the conguration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard

TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).

Important

• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

• Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.403)

1.

Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.

3.

Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.

4.

Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.

5.

In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port .

6.

Click New Port .

After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP

Printer Port Wizard .

7.

Click Next .

8.

In Printer Name or IP Address , enter the printer’s IP address.

9.

Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.

10.

Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

11.

Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports , and that the port is selected.

12.

Click Close to close the printer properties window.

Network Setting 417


Sharing the Printer in Windows

If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows

Vista, or Windows Server 2008, the computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients) connected to it for printing. This topic describes how to share the printer in Windows.

Important

• We recommend that your network administrator congure your network for printer sharing.

1.


2.

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window.

418 Network Setting


3.

On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.

4.

To print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.

If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver le, insert the provided User

Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.

5.

Click OK .

Important

• When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print server.

Network Setting 419


Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.


Settings page.

6.

Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

Item

Frame Type

NCP Burst Mode

Print Application

Packet Signature

Bindery

PServer

File Server Name




RPrinter Print Server Name

Details

Specify the type of frame to use in NetWare.


NCP Burst Mode.

This mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, leave the setting On.

On

Default Setting

Disabled


• Bindery PServer

• RPrinter

• NDS PServer

• NPrinter

NDS PServer

Select If Requested by Server to use packet signature.

If Requested by Server

Specify the name of a le server that has a NetWare print server.

(0-47 characters)

-


(0-47 characters)

-


(0-20 characters)


(1-15 seconds)


(0-47 characters)

-

-

5

420 Network Setting

NDS

PServer

Item

Printer Number

Tree Name

Context Name




NPrinter Print Server Name

Printer Number

7.


Details



(0-15)

Specify the name of an NDS tree that has a NetWare print server.

(0-32 characters)

-

0

Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server.

(0-255 characters)

-


(0-64 characters)

-


(0-20 characters)

-


(1-255 seconds)


(0-47 characters)

-



(0-254)

5

0


Default Setting

Network Setting 421


Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type

To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame type in your NetWare environment.

Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer Control Panel.

Note

• You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.

Important

• Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.



Specifying the Frame Type Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

2.

In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.

3.


4.

In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.

5.

Click ETHERNET II under Frame Type in TCP/IP .

6.

In IP Address , enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in

Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address .

Important

• You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using

RemoteUI.

7.

Click Set .

8.


9.


422 Network Setting


Specifying the Frame Type Using the Printer Control Panel

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare , and then press the ► button.

5.


Return to the NetWare menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type , and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service , and then press the ► button.

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.


10.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Important


Note

• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Network Setting 423


Specifying NetWare Print Services

Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues, and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.

• NWADMIN

• PCONSOLE

(from Novell, provided with NetWare)

Important

• If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client software) must be installed as the client software application.

• NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.

This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary depending on the environment.

Choosing the type of print services

Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions as needed.

Note

• In NetWare 5.1 or 6.0, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare documentation.

• NDS (Novell Directory Service) and bindery

NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.

• Queue server mode and remote printer mode

Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.

• Queue server mode

When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is required for each network interface.

• Remote printer mode

In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.

424 Network Setting


Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server

Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.

2.

Run Quick Setup.

1.

Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.

2.

Enter a desired name in Print Server Name . To use an existing print server, click the button at right and choose the name from the list.

3.

Enter a desired printer name in Name .

4.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type . To use the printer in remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type , click Communications , and set Ports to LPT1 and

Connection Type to Manual Load .

5.

Enter a desired queue name in Name .

6.

In Volume , enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.

7.

Complete other settings as needed and click OK .

Note

• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Write down the print server name for future reference.

• When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”

3.

Set a password.

1.

Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details .

2.

Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.

3.

Click OK to close the password input dialog box.

4.

Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.

4.

To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.

To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le server and press the Enter key.

Note

• This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.

Network Setting 425


Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.

2.

Switch to bindery mode.

3.

If the print server has not been created, create it.

1.

In Available Options , select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.

2.

Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.

Note

• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Write down the print server name for future reference.

4.

Specify the printer type.

1.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type . To use remote printer mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load .

2.

Press the Esc key.

3.

After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.

5.

Set a password.

1.

In Available Options , select Print Servers and press the Enter key.

2.

Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.

3.

Select Password , and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.

4.

Enter the password and press the Enter key.

6.

Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE is nished.

7.

Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.

426 Network Setting


Specifying NetWare Protocols

Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.

Note

• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.407)

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.


Settings page.

6.

Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.

7.

To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode .

Note

• Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On .

8.

In Print Application , click the print service to be used.

Note

• Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at the same time.

9.

For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature .

10.

Complete the following settings based on the selected service.

• If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In File Server Name , enter the le server name.

2.

In Print Server Name , enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.424)"

3.

In Print Server Password , enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.424)"

4.

In Polling Interval , specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

• If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name , enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying


2.

In Printer Number , enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.424)"

Network Setting 427


• If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)

1.

In Tree Name and Context Name , enter the tree and context name of the print server.

2.

In Print Server Name , enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.424)"

3.

In Print Server Password , enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying


4.

In Polling Interval , specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

• If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name , enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.424)" Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

2.

In Printer Number , enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.424)"

11.


12.

Click Reset to activate the settings.

For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.

(→P.411)

Note

• If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown , and the User Name information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER .

428 Network Setting


Conguring NetWare Network Settings

To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.

Important


1.

Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.

For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.422)

2.

Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.424)

3.

Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.427)

After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the

NetWare network.

4.

Connect to the NetWare network.

Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and operating system documentation.

5.

Install the printer driver.

Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.

6.

Follow these steps to congure the printer port. This step is not necessary if you specied the printer destination during installation of the printer driver.

1.


2.

Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties .

3.

Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.

4.

As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service settings.

Network Setting 429


Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software .

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.




Important




1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


Note




430 Network Setting

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)

Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

• If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.433)

• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.436)

• If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.438)

Network Setting 431


Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk

Protocol Settings page.

6.

Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

Item

Phase Type

Details

Specify whether to use AppleTalk.

If you will use AppleTalk, choose Phase 2 .

If you will not use AppleTalk, choose Disabled .

Name (*1)

Zone (*2)

Specify the object name used by AppleTalk (in up to

31 single-byte or 15 double-byte characters).

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ * : =

Specify the printer zone name, up to 31 single-byte characters.

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ : = Also avoid using “*” (which represents the default zone) in the middle of a string.

Default Setting

Disabled

Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)

*

*1: The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer.

By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.

Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7.


432 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)

To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.

Activating AppleTalk on the printer

Important

• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk , and then press the ► button.

4.


5.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Important


Note

• By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer zone name.


Network Setting 433


Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)

Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

In System Preferences , click Network to display the Network window.

2.

In Show , choose Built-in Ethernet . Next, click AppleTalk , select Make AppleTalk Active , and click Apply now .

3.

Close the Network window and save the settings.

4.

Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder .

5.

Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.

6.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List , click Add .

434 Network Setting


7.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add .

Network Setting 435


Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh)

Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network.

Important

• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.405)

Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)

Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer

Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

1.


2.


3.

Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.

4.

Click More Printers .

436 Network Setting

5.

In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF) .


6.

Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add .

7.

Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.

Important

• If imagePROGRAF Generic is indicated in Kind , the printer information is not properly acquired. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network. (→P.565)

Network Setting 437


Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)

In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Important

• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Printer Setup Utility

(or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS Service Name . You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.407)

1.


2.


3.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List , click Add .

4.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add .

438 Network Setting

Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Printer Hard Disk Operations

Printer hard disk operations are available from the following programs and interfaces.

• Printer driver

• imagePROGRAF HDI Driver

• imagePROGRAF Free Layout

• Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

• imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

• RemoteUI

• Control Panel

The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.

Windows

Printer driver image-

PROGRAF

Free Layout image-

PROGRAF

HDI Driver

Color image-

RUNNER

Enlargement

Copy image-

PROGRAF

Status

Monitor

RemoteUI

Control

Panel

Mac OS Printer driver

Color image-

RUNNER

Enlargement

Copy image-

PROGRAF

Printmonitor

Saving print jobs

Operation

Print

Print (auto delete)

Operations with saved jobs

Save in mail box

Save data before printing(*1)

Print saved jobs

Delete saved jobs

Availability Availability Availability Availability Availability

Yes Yes No No No

Yes Yes No No No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Hard Disk 439

Hard Disk

Windows

Printer driver image-

PROGRAF

Free Layout image-

PROGRAF

HDI Driver

Color image-

RUNNER

Enlargement

Copy image-

PROGRAF

Status

Monitor

RemoteUI

Control

Panel

Mac OS Printer driver

Color image-

RUNNER

Enlargement

Copy image-

PROGRAF

Printmonitor

Operation

Job queue management

Display job queue

Mail box management

Delete

Priority

Move saved jobs

Modify saved jobs

No

No

Modify mail boxes

Print a list of saved jobs

Availability

No

No

No

No

No

Availability

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Availability

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Availability

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Availability

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Display a list of saved jobs

No No Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes Yes Other operations

Display free hard disk space

No

Initialize hard disk

No

Recover after errors

No

Display error messages No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1: This option is available with Print , Print (auto delete) , and Save in mail box . Print jobs are saved and then printed.

440 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Saved Print Jobs

Saving print jobs refers to the process of sending print jobs from a computer and storing them on the printer’s hard disk. By saving print jobs, you can print them repeatedly as needed without sending them from a computer again.

Saving print jobs enables you to do the following things.

• Save the time spent using a computer

When you send a print job to the printer, you can either print it and save it on the printer at the same time or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required quantity later without the need to use a computer again.

• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur

If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing the error without resending the print job from a computer.

• Streamline printing work

Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night, for example.

Hard Disk 441

Hard Disk

Output Method ( Send job to )

To save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk, select Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS

X). Three options are available in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X): Print , Print

(auto delete) , and Save in mail box . Optionally, you can also select Save data before printing .

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)

• Print (auto delete)

Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.

• Save in mail box

Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.

• Save data before printing

This option is available in combination with Print , Print (auto delete) , and Save in mail box . Print jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.

Note

• The option in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) cannot be specied during

HP-GL/2 printing. The option in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) is Print .

442 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Storage destination

The storage area on the printer’s hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage area. Print jobs in the “job queue” or “Common Box” are saved in the temporary storage area. Jobs in

“Personal Boxes” are saved in the permanent storage area.

• Job queue

Print jobs in progress(*1) are temporarily saved in the job queue, a storage space where jobs are saved in the order they will be printed.

Up to ten jobs can be stored in the queue. Subsequent jobs are treated as "standby" jobs, to be processed when possible.

*1: Jobs that are being saved, received, processed, printed, or deleted, or jobs that have been interrupted or are waiting to print

• Common Box

If you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) as the format for print jobs sent from the computer, the jobs are saved in the common box.

There is one Common Box, numbered “00”. A password cannot be set for the Common Box.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.

• If there are more than 100 jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined

• If the temporary storage area becomes full during reception of print jobs for which you have selected Print or Print (auto delete) in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)

• If there is not enough space in the temporary and permanent storage areas during reception of print jobs for which you have selected Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or

Send job to (in Mac OS X)

• Personal Boxes

You can store jobs in Personal Boxes in either of the following ways.

• By moving a job stored in the Common Box into a Personal Box

• By selecting Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)

There are nine Personal Boxes, numbered “01” to “09”. You can specify a name and password for each Personal Box.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all Personal Boxes combined.

Hard Disk 443

Hard Disk

Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the

Printer Driver

To save print jobs sent from software or systems other than the printer driver provided with the printer, complete the Output Method and Save and Print settings in the printer menu.

Important

• Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function.

Specifying Output Method

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Output Method , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the output method, and then press the OK button.

• Print


• Print (Auto Del)


• Save: Box 01 (Here, the number represents a box number)

Save print jobs on the printer. If you select this option, go to step 5 and select the box for saving print jobs.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box, and then press the OK button.

Specifying Save and Print

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save and Print , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , or Off , and then press the OK button.

If you select On , print jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.

444 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Saving Print Jobs

You can save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.

Save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk as follows.

• Using the printer driver (Windows) (→P.445)

• Using imagePROGRAF HDI Driver (Windows)

See "Output Method Setting" in the HDI Driver Guide.

• Using imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Windows)

See the section on the Output Method dialog box in the Free Layout Guide For Windows.

• Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Windows)

See the section on the Output Method button on the Output Settings sheet in the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy Guide For Windows.

• Using the printer driver (Mac OS X) (→P.447)

Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Mac OS)

See the section on the Output Method button on the Output Settings sheet in the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy Guide For Macintosh.

Using the printer driver (Windows)

1.

Access the Page Setup sheet.

Hard Disk 445

Hard Disk

2.

Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.

3.

Choose an Output Method .

• Print






If you choose Save in mail box , also specify the destination Personal Box in the Mail box list.

Note

• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display Personal Box names in the Mail box list, as acquired from the printer.



4.

In Name of data to be saved , specify how to name saved print jobs.

• To use the le name, choose Use le name .

• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name .

5.

Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.

446 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Using the printer driver (Mac OS X)

1.

Access the Additional Settings pane.

2.

Choose an Send job to .

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.





The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box . Here, specify the name and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.

1.

In Document title , enter a name to identify saved print jobs.

2.

Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.

3.

Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.

Note



Hard Disk 447

Hard Disk

Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box

If you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) in the printer driver as the format for print jobs sent from the computer, the jobs are saved in the common box. (→P.441)

You can select Save: Shared Box > Off in the printer menu so that print jobs for which you have selected Output

Method > Print in the printer driver are deleted from the common box after printing.

Use this function when printing highly condential documents.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save: Shared Box , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off , and then press the OK button.

448 Hard Disk

Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting Other

Jobs)

You can delete queued jobs.

Hard Disk

You can also select queued jobs and give them rst priority, to print them immediately after the printer has printed jobs that are currently being processed or printed.

Note

• You cannot interrupt jobs that are currently being saved, processed, printed, or deleted by printing other jobs before these processes are nished.

You can manage queued print jobs as follows.

• Using the Control Panel

• Using RemoteUI

• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

Hard Disk 449

Hard Disk

Using the Control Panel

1.

Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng .

2.

You can manage queued jobs as follows.

• Deleting queued jobs

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu , and then press the OK button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete , and then press the OK button.

• Changing the order of printing

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu , and then press the OK button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print rst, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Priority , and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

On the Print Job page, select the job to manage and how to manage it. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

450 Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

On the Job sheet, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.

• Preempting other jobs

• Pausing printing

• Resuming printing

• Canceling print jobs

Hard Disk

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

On the Driver pane, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.

• Preempting other jobs

• Pausing printing

• Resuming printing

• Canceling print jobs

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.

Hard Disk 451

Hard Disk

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes

By default, no passwords are set for personal boxes. For greater security, you can set passwords for each personal box. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the personal box settings, as well as to display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the personal box.

Note

• A password cannot be set for the common box.

• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001-9999.

• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access personal boxes in Administrator

Mode in RemoteUI.

You can set a password for a personal box as follows.

• Using RemoteUI


• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

452 Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

1.

On the Stored Job page, select the personal box for a password.

2.

Click Edit .

Hard Disk

3.

In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set Password : Select the check box.

• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)

• Conrmation Number : Re-enter the password to conrm it.

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

Hard Disk 453

Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1.

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box for a password and click Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.

2.

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings .

454 Hard Disk

3.

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set password : Select the check box.


• Re-enter to conrm : Re-enter the password to conrm it.

Hard Disk

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1.

In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job and click Set .

2.

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set password : Select the check box.


• Verify : Re-enter the password to conrm it.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.

Hard Disk 455

Hard Disk

Naming Personal Boxes

By default, personal boxes are unnamed. You can name them for easier management.

You can assign a name to a personal box as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



Using RemoteUI

1.

On the Stored Job page, select the personal box to identify.

Note


2.

Click Edit .

456 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

3.

In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, enter the personal box name in Inbox Name and click OK .



1.

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box to identify and click Open .

Note


Hard Disk 457

Hard Disk

2.

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings .

3.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK .


458 Hard Disk

Hard Disk


1.

On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job and click Set .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

2.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK .


Hard Disk 459

Hard Disk

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs

You can display saved print jobs in the Common Box and each Personal Box.

You can view a list of stored print jobs as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Display a list of saved print jobs.

• To display jobs saved in the Common Box

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management , and then press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope.


3.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List .

• To display jobs saved in Personal Boxes

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.

4.

Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List .

Note

• You can check a list of print jobs in the queue by choosing Job Management → Job Queue Ope.

.

460 Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

Choose a mail box on the Stored Job page to display a list of jobs saved in that mail box.

Hard Disk

Note


Jobs saved in the mail box are listed.

Note

• Document and owner names during HP-GL/2 printing

A job number is automatically assigned by the printer as the document name or title. GL2 JOB#001

(Range: 001-210)

The owner name is blank.


Hard Disk 461

Hard Disk


On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open .

Note


Jobs saved in that mail box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.

Note

• Document and owner names during HP-GL/2 printing


(Range: 001-210)

The owner name is blank.


462 Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.

Hard Disk

Note

• Document and user names during HP-GL/2 printing


(Range: 001-210)

The user name is blank.

Note




Hard Disk 463

Hard Disk

Printing a List of Saved Jobs

You can print a list of saved print jobs in the common box and each personal box.

You can also print a list of print jobs by using the Control Panel.

1.


2.

Print a list of saved print jobs.

• To print a list of jobs saved in the Common Box

1.


2.



3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List , and then press the ► button.

4.


• To print a list of jobs saved in Personal Boxes

1.


2.



3.


4.

Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List , and then press the ► button.

6.


464 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Printing Saved Jobs

You can print jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Print the saved job.

• Printing jobs in the common box

1.


2.



3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the ► button.

6.

Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.

7.

Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.

• Printing jobs in personal boxes

1.


2.



3.


4.

Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.

5.


6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the ► button.

8.

Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.

9.

Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.

Hard Disk 465

Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

1.

On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.

Note


2.

Select the print job in the list and click Print .

466 Hard Disk

3.

On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK .

Hard Disk



1.


Note


Hard Disk 467

Hard Disk

2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Print .

3.

In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK .



1.


468 Hard Disk

Note



2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Resume Printing to display the Resume Printing dialog box.

Hard Disk

3.

Specify the number of copies and click the OK button.


Hard Disk 469

Hard Disk

Moving saved jobs

Print jobs for which Print is selected as the format in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) are saved in the Common Box, number “00”. However, jobs in this mail box will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.

• If there are more than 100 saved jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined

• If the temporary storage area becomes full during reception of print jobs for which you have selected

Print or Print (auto delete) in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)

• If the temporary and permanent storage areas no longer have enough space during reception of print jobs for which you have selected Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)

You can move jobs to Personal Boxes “01” to “09” to prevent them from being deleted. (Up to 100 jobs can be stored here.)

You can also move saved jobs from one Personal Box to another.

You can move stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



Note

• Jobs saved in Personal Boxes cannot be moved to the Common Box.

Using RemoteUI

1.


470 Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Note


2.

Select the print job in the list and click Move .

3.

On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination Personal Box in the Destination mail box list and click OK .


Hard Disk 471

Hard Disk


1.


Note


2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Move .

472 Hard Disk

3.

In the Move dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK .

Hard Disk


Hard Disk 473

Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

1.


Note



2.

Select the print job in the list and click Move .

3.

In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK .


474 Hard Disk

Displaying Details of Saved Jobs

You can view details of stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



Using RemoteUI

1.


Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Details .

Hard Disk

Hard Disk 475

Hard Disk

The Details of the saved document page is displayed.



1.


476 Hard Disk

Note


2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties .

Hard Disk

The Properties dialog box is displayed.


Hard Disk 477

Hard Disk


1.

On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.

Note




478 Hard Disk

Renaming Saved Jobs

You can rename stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



Using RemoteUI

1.


Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Details .

Hard Disk

Hard Disk 479

Hard Disk

3.

On the Details of the saved document page, click Change Document .

4.

On the Rename Saved Document page, enter the new job name in Document Name and click OK .


480 Hard Disk


1.


Hard Disk

Note


2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties .

Hard Disk 481

Hard Disk

3.

In the Properties dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK .



1.


Note



482 Hard Disk

2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Set .

3.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK .

Documents cannot be renamed unless a password has been set. In this case, specify a password. After renaming, you can cancel the password as needed.

Hard Disk


Hard Disk 483

Hard Disk

Deleting Saved Jobs

You can delete saved jobs in the box shared among all users and in each personal box.

Delete stored print jobs as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Delete the saved job.

• To delete saved jobs in the Common Box

1.


2.



3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete , and then press the ► button.

6.

Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.

• To delete saved jobs in Personal Boxes

1.


2.



3.


4.

Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

5.


6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete , and then press the ► button.

8.

Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.

484 Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

1.


Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Delete .


Hard Disk

Hard Disk 485

Hard Disk


1.


Note


2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Delete .


486 Hard Disk


1.


Hard Disk

Note



2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Delete .


Hard Disk 487

Hard Disk

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space

You can check the space available on the printer’s hard disk as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information , and then press the ► button.

Note

• You can also check the free hard disk space by pressing the Information button three times.

Using RemoteUI

To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.


488 Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.

■Hard Disk Sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

Hard Disk


Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.

■Hard Disk Pane in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor


Hard Disk 489

Hard Disk

Erasing Data on the Printer’s Hard Disk

You can erase data on the printer’s hard disk from the Control Panel.

There are three ways to erase the data, as follows.

Erasure Method

High Speed

Time Required

A few seconds

Details

Erases le management data for print job data stored on the printer’s hard disk. Choose this method for relatively fast erasure. Because only the le management data is erased, the print job data itself is not erased. Note that it may be possible to read this data using commercial data recovery software.

Secure High Spd.

About 40 minutes Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verication is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase highly condential data. Note that it may be possible to read the overwritten data using specialized data recovery tools.

Secure About 20 hours Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data

(one time each). Verication is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially condential data. It is virtually impossible to recover the overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of the U.S. Department of Defense.

Note

• For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically destroying the hard disk. In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.

• Erase HDD Data is not available if there is a job queue.

Also note that during execution of Erase HDD Data , print jobs cannot be processed.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the method of erasure, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button to display the conrmation screen.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button to start erasure.

490 Hard Disk

Adjusting the Printhead

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

Correcting Print Misalignment

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the

Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically”. (→P.491)

For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.493)

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by printing and reading a test pattern.

There are two modes for automatic adjustment: Standard Adj.

and Advanced Adj.

.

Standard Adj.

will x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj.

.

If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the

Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.493)

Follow these steps for standard automatic adjustment of the Printhead.

1.

Prepare one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj.

is selected or ve when Advanced Adj.

is selected.

When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.

• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.133)

• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.107)

• Loading Rolls in the Roll Holder Slot (→P.109)

• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.110)

Note

• Use Standard Adj.

if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between colors to appear as attractive as possible.

• Use Advanced Adj.

to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using

Advanced Adj.

for printing at a higher level of image quality.

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

• This function is not available for CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear

Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try another type of media or adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.493)

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 491


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Advanced Adj.


6.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the Printhead alignment.

492 Adjustments for Better Print Quality


Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead

Alignment Automatically”. (→P.491)

Follow these steps for standard manual adjustment of the Printhead.

Note

• If Manual Head Adj is unusable although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj.

in Auto Head

Adj.

.

Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Auto Head Adj.

once.

1.

When using sheets, have an unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger ready.






Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj , and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D , and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1 , and then press the ► button.



8.

Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment. After you determine the pattern with straight lines, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-7 to D-11 .

10.

Press the ◄ button.

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting , and then press the ► button.

12.


The printer now goes online.



Adjusting the Printhead Orientation

If printed lines are misaligned, try adjusting the angle of the Printhead. Even slight misalignment can be corrected. Adjust the Printhead orientation by printing and reading a test pattern.

1.

When using sheets, have an unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger ready.






Note

• When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. Using paper that you have not specied on the printer may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.

• We recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.

2.


3.

Select Adjust Printer Head Inc. Adj.

→ Yes and press the OK button.

After the Printhead is moved, a message is displayed prompting you to open the Top Cover.

4.

At this point, open the Top Cover.

5.

Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and close the Top Cover.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.



Important


6.

Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the straightest set of lines.

Note

• If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, choose the two sets of lines that are least misaligned.

7.

Open the Top Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to match the number (or the square) of the straightest set of lines.

If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle Adjustment Lever to a position between the numbers (or between the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that are least misaligned.

8.


The Printhead orientation is adjusted, and the printer goes online.



Adjusting the Printhead Height

If printed documents rub against the printer during printing or if the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, it may help to raise the Printhead.

If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.


Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed. There are two modes for adjusting the amount paper is fed, Standard Adj.

and Advanced Adj.

.

Advanced Adj.

offers a wider range of adjustment than Standard Adj.

. If using Standard Adj.

does not eliminate streaks, or if streaks are quite noticeable, try Advanced Adj.

.

Follow the steps below for standard automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, you must adjust the feed amount manually. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually”.

(→P.501)

Note

• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.504)

• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.

Important

• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint . Note that if you select Automatic , the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document . (→P.180)

Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint , and then press the OK button.



Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount automatically.

1.

Prepare one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj.

is selected or two when Advanced Adj.

is selected (or one when using a sheet A2-sized or larger).






Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj.

or Advanced Adj.


6.


A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount and returns to online mode.

Note

• In some cases, the feed amount cannot be adjusted automatically. If so, choose Advanced Adj.

in Auto Band Adj.

(→P.50)

• If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.500)



Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

• The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.

Press the Online button to resume printing.

Note

• The Fine Band Adj.

value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, the value is reset to 0 if you execute Auto Band Adj.

, Manual Band Adj , or Adjust Length .



Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

This topic describes how to adjust the feed amount manually.

When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, adjust the feed amount manually. We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of media. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically”. (→P.498)

Note

• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.504)

Important


• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint . Note that if you select Automatic , the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document . (→P.180)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint , and then press the OK button.

Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount manually.

1.

When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready.






Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.



2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj , and then press the ► button.

5.


Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.

6.

Examine test pattern A for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.

Note

• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

7.

Examine test pattern B for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

The feed amount is adjusted, and the printer goes online.

If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.503)



Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to printing in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

• The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.


Note

• The Fine Band Adj.

value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, the value is reset to 0 if you execute Auto Band Adj.

, Manual Band Adj , or Adjust Length .



Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy

To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount.

Note

• If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

(→P.501)

Important


• To apply the results of adjusting the measurement scale for better accuracy in printing, you must rst set

Feed Priority to Print Length . Note that if you select Automatic , the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Line Drawing/Text . (→P.180)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Length or Automatic , and then press the OK button.

Follow these steps to adjust the scale for better accuracy.

1.

When using sheets, load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger.






Note

• When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. When the paper type is not specied, the printing quality may be affected without the correct adjustment of the feeding.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.



2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length , and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.

The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.

6.

Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.

You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value and ▼ to decrease it.

If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed longer, set the value toward the negative side.

Note

• You can also specify the adjustment value by selecting Paper Details → Adjust Length .



Adjusting the Vacuum Strength

When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if paper rubs against the printer or the edge is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the

OK button.


Maintenance

Ink Tanks

Ink Tanks

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the side.

When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “A” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank part numbers.

• BK Ink Tank PFI-102BK

• MBK Ink Tank PFI-102MBK

• C Ink Tank PFI-102C

• M Ink Tank PFI-102M

• Y Ink Tank PFI-102Y

130 ml (4.4  oz) per color

Ink Tanks

Note

• For instructions on replacing Ink Tank, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.508)

Maintenance 507

Ink Tanks

Replacing Ink Tanks

Compatible Ink Tank

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the side.

Request an Ink Tank with the same label when you purchase a new Ink Tank. For more information, see

“Ink Tanks”. (→P.507)

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank

Take the following precautions when handling an Ink Tank.

Caution

• For safety, keep an Ink Tank out of the reach of children.

• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

Important

• Before removing an Ink Tank from the pouch for installation, shake it gently seven or eight times. If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• There may be ink around the ink holes of Ink Tank you remove. Handle an Ink Tank carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.

Using an old Ink Tank may affect the printing quality.

• Do not remove the Ink Tank if the printer is not used for a long period (a month or more). Ink remaining in the printer may become clogged and cause of printing problems.

• Coverage may be uneven if you replace the ink during a print job.

508 Maintenance

Replacing an Ink Tank

1.


You can replace Ink Tank if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine , or if messages advise you to check the amount of ink left or replace the Ink Tank.

Ink Tanks

If a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank, press the OK button. Steps 2-4 are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 5 and remove the Ink Tank.

Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printing or printhead cleaning.

Note

• Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being fed.

2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank , and then press the ► button.

4.


A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Next, remove the

Ink Tank.

5.

Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.

Maintenance 509

Ink Tanks

6.

Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement and lift the Ink Tank Lock

Lever to open it.

7.

Hold the empty Ink Tank by the grip to remove it, and press the OK button.

Note

• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

• Dispose of used Ink Tank according to local regulations.

510 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

8.

Before opening the pouch, shake the Ink Tank gently seven or eight times. Agitate the ink in the

Ink Tank by slowly turning the Ink Tank upside-down and right side up several times.

Note

• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

9.

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

Note

• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.

• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

10.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with the ink holes down.

Important

• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.

If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the

Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

Maintenance 511

Ink Tanks

11.

Close the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it clicks.

12.

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

Note

• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.

13.

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

The printer returns to the mode before replacement of Ink Tank.

512 Maintenance

Checking Ink Tank Levels

On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.

The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless an error message is displayed.

Ink Tanks

During error messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.

These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.508)

Maintenance 513

Ink Tanks

When to Replace Ink Tanks

Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen

When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.

You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.513)

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink

If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the

Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.

514 Maintenance

Printheads

Printheads

Printhead

• Printhead PF-03

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.518)

Checking the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.516)

Improving the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles. Clean the Printhead if the printed test pattern was faint.

For instructions on cleaning the Printhead, see “Cleaning the Printhead”. (→P.517)

Maintenance 515

Printheads

Checking for Nozzle Clogging

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq.

menu for automatic nozzle checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.50)

1.

Load unused paper.





2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print , and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check , and then press the ► button.

5.


The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.

6.

Check the printing results.

If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.

If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors are clogged.

If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging.

1.

Clean the Printhead. (→P.517)

2.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact your Canon dealer.

516 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printhead

Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note


menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.50)



1.


Printheads

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

• Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about three minutes to complete.

• Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about four minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.516)

Note

• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A , try Head Cleaning B . If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

Maintenance 517

Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

When to replace the Printhead

Replace the Printhead in the following situations.

• If the printing quality does not improve even after two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu

• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the printhead.

• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead

Compatible Printhead

For information on the compatible Printhead, see “Printhead”. (→P.515)

Precautions when handling the Printhead

Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Printhead in a place inaccessible for children.


• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of burns.

Important

• Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect printing quality.

• If you need to store a Printhead temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal contacts (→P.522) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.

• Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.

• Never touch the Printhead nozzles or the metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.

518 Maintenance

Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

Follow the steps below to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink leak from the Printhead, which may cause stains.

Note

• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.

• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new

Printhead for replacement.

• Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after replacement of the Printhead. (→P.50)

1.

If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.

(→P.329)

2.

Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.538)

3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance , and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head


6.


Ink is now lled.

After about three minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

7.

Open the Top Cover.

Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.

Maintenance 519

Printheads

8.

If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Important

• Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).

• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.

9.

Lift the Carriage Cover to open it fully.

520 Maintenance

10.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.

Printheads

11.

Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.

12.

Remove the used Printhead.

Caution

• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.

Note

• Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.

Maintenance 521

Printheads

13.

Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.

Important

• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or the metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.

14.

While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange

Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.

Important

• Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas other than the grips.

• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.

• The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.

We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth. This ink is non-toxic.

• Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regulations.

522 Maintenance

Printheads

15.

With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Making sure that the metal contacts do not touch the Carriage, carefully push the printhead rmly into the carriage.

16.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.

17.

Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.

18.

Push the Carriage Cover forward until it clicks.

Maintenance 523

Printheads

19.


Ink now lls the system.

After about 13 minutes, the Printhead alignment will be automatically adjusted, and the printer will go online.

If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.

Important

• Never remove an Ink Tank while the system is lling with ink.

• If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead alignment will not be adjusted. In this case, adjust the alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Auto Head Adj.

in Advanced

Adj.

. (→P.491)

524 Maintenance

Cutter Unit

Cutter Unit

A reaplacement Cutter Unit.

• Cutter Unit CT-05

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Cutter Unit, see “Replacing the Cutter Unit”. (→P.526)

Cutter Unit

Maintenance 525

Cutter Unit

Replacing the Cutter Unit

Note

• For information on compatible Cutter Unit, see “Cutter Unit”. (→P.525)

• During Cutter Unit replacement, do not open the Carriage Cover. Ink will automatically ll the Printhead after the Carriage Cover is opened, which consumes ink.

1.


2.


3.

Select Maintenance → Change Cutter → Yes , and then press the OK button.

After the Carriage is centered, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

Note

• If you do not respond within two minutes, cutter replacement is canceled and the printer goes online automatically. In this case, repeat the steps above.

4.

Open the Top Cover.

5.

If the Cutter Unit or Carriage is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Important


526 Maintenance

Cutter Unit

6.

Hold the Cutter Unit by the grip (a). Pushing down at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Carriage.

Important

• Never touch any part of the Cutter Unit except the grips (a) and (b). This poses a risk of injury and may stain your hands. Also, it may damage the printer.

Caution

• Dispose of the used Cutter Unit according to local regulations.

• Do not disassemble the Cutter Unit. Touching the blade may cause injury.

7.

Hold the new Cutter Unit by the grip (a). Pushing down at the position indicated (b), attach it to the Carriage until it clicks into place.

8.


The Carriage moves into position and a conrmation message is displayed regarding resetting the cut counter.

9.


The printer now goes online.

Maintenance 527

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

A replacement Maintenance Cartridge. Maintenance Cartridge includes a Shaft Cleaner.

• Maintenance Cartridge MC-07

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.

(→P.528)

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge

For information on the compatible Maintenance Cartridge, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.528)

Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge

Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.


Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.

• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance

Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

528 Maintenance


Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

1.


You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, go to step 6 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.

Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being lled.

If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to be blurry.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart , and then press the ► button.

5.


6.

At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

Maintenance 529


7.

Hold the handle (a) of the used Maintenance Cartridge and pull out the cartridge. Grasp the handles on both sides (b) and keep the cartridge level as you remove it.

Important

• Used Maintenance Cartridge is heavy. Always grasp the cartridge handles on both sides rmly and keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.

8.

Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

9.

Keeping the used Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it in the plastic bag of the new Maintenance

Cartridge. Expel excess air and seal the zipper. After making sure the zipper is rmly sealed, fold the bag in two.

530 Maintenance


10.

Conrm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box, and store it so that it stays level.

Important

• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.

Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• In accordance with its active and ongoing policy to protect the environment, Canon collects used

Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.

11.

Holding the handles on both sides of the new Maintenance Cartridge (a), insert it completely, keeping it level.

12.

Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

13.


The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.

After about ve seconds when initialization is nished, a message prompts you to replace the

Shaft Cleaner.

14.


After the Carriage is moved, the Display Screen indicates Open top cover.

.

Note

• If you select No , the printer goes back online.

Maintenance 531


15.

Replace the Shaft Cleaner. Replacing the (→P.533)

The printer returns to the mode before replacement of the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed advising you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, printing is not possible. Make sure that the Maintenance Cartridge is installed correctly.

If a print job was in progress when the Maintenance Cartridge was replaced, printing is resumed.

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after the printer goes back online. This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

• If you replace the Maintenance Cartridge when the printer is off, do not remove the Maintenance

Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after you turn the printer on again after replacement.

This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

532 Maintenance


Replacing the Shaft Cleaner

Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge. New Shaft Cleaner is included with replacement Maintenance Cartridge.

After Maintenance Cartridge replacement, a message on the Display Screen prompts you to replace the Shaft

Cleaner. Select Yes and press the OK button. Next, go to step 3.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. S. Cleaner , and then press the ► button.

4.


After the Carriage is moved, the Display Screen indicates Open top cover.

.

5.

Open the Top Cover.

6.

Hold the Shaft Cleaner on the right side of the Carriage by the grips (a) and pull it toward you to remove it.

Important

• Never touch parts other than those mentioned in the instructions. This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

Maintenance 533


7.

After removing the cap of the new Shaft Cleaner, hold it by the grips (a) and attach it to the

Carriage.

Push the Shaft Cleaner until it clicks into place.

Note

• Attach the cap from the new Shaft Cleaner on the used one. Be sure to put the used Shaft Cleaner in the small box before putting it in the larger box with the used Maintenance Cartridge for disposal.

8.


The Carriage is moved, and the printer goes online.

534 Maintenance


Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity

The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.

Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display

Screen.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.528)

Maintenance 535


When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.

If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart replacement.

is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.535)

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted

Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.) To check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the Maintenance

Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the Maintenance

Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.

536 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

About once a month, clean the printer exterior.

1.


2.

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Caution

• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot (a), power cord plug, and so on. Dry these parts with a dry cloth.

Caution

• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.

Important

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

4.

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

Maintenance 537


Cleaning Inside the Top Cover

Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.

• If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

• After you have used up a roll

• After borderless printing

• After printing on small paper

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris

• If you have replaced the roll

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust

Important

• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend always cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

2.

If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing

Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush (c), provided with the printer, to wipe it away.

Note

• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

538 Maintenance


3.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it.

Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller (a), all over the Platen (b), the Paper Retainer

(c), the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (d), the Ejection Guide (e), and the guide rail (f).

Important

• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust and affect the printing quality.

• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.


4.


Maintenance 539


Cleaning the Paper Retainer

Clean the Paper Retainer about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean the Paper Retainer in the following situations to ensure the printer offers a comfortable working environment.

• If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

• After printing on small paper

Caution

• During cleaning, use a type of paper that does not generate much dust from cutting, such as Plain

Paper. It may affect printing quality if you use lm or other media that are more likely to generate debris when cut, or that have a surface nish that may come off.

1.


2.

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Caution

• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning and maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.


4.

Fold a sheet of Plain Paper two or three times (a) and insert it under the Paper Retainer (b) behind the printer to wipe the entire surface of the Paper Retainer clean.

5.


6.

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

540 Maintenance



Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note


menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.50)



1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning , and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

• Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about three minutes to complete.

• Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about four minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.516)

Note

• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A , try Head Cleaning B . If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

Maintenance 541

Other Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Preparing to Transfer the Printer

To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new location. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.

Note

• It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen prompts you to replace the

Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer preparations. (→P.528)

• Do not tilt the printer in transit. Ink inside the printer may leak and cause stains. If it is necessary to stand the printer up or tilt it, contact your Canon dealer.

1.

Remove the paper.

• Rolls (→P.113), (→P.114), (→P.114)

• Sheet (→P.137)

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer , and then press the ► button.

5.


The printer now starts preparing for transfer.

If a message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to open the Ink Tank Cover, follow the procedure starting with step 6.

6.

Open the Ink Tank Cover.

542 Maintenance

7.

Open the Ink Tank Lock Lever and remove every Ink Tank.

Other Maintenance

Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

Note

• Store the Ink Tank you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

8.

Close every Ink Tank Lock Lever, and close the Ink Tank Cover.

At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.

When the suction is nished, Turn Power Off!!

is displayed.

9.

Press the Power button and turn off the printer.

Important

• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tanks, wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.

Maintenance 543

Other Maintenance

10.

Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

11.

Open the Top Cover.

12.

Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper to the Carriage Shaft.

Important


Note

• Here, the Belt Stopper is the one that was removed and stored after initial installation.

544 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

13.


14.

Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.

15.

Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package them in a shipping box.

Maintenance 545

Other Maintenance

Updating the Firmware

Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.

Conrming the rmware version

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information , and then press ► .

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info , and then press the ► button.

The rmware version is displayed.

Updating the Firmware

To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware, visit the Canon website.

546 Maintenance

Frequently Asked Questions

Troubleshooting

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks in the answer column.

Question Answer

How do I print on a roll?

When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify the paper type and length, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver.

Þ Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.82)

How do I print manually?

When printing manually, specify the paper type and size in the printer driver, and then load the paper.

Þ Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.86)

How do I switch between printing on a roll and printing manually?

Press the

Þ

Feeder Selection roll and a sheet.

button to switch the paper source between the

Selecting the Paper Source (→P.104)

How do I change the paper type or size?

Specify the type and size of paper, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver.

• Specifying it in the Printer Driver

Þ Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.191)

• Specifying it on the Control Panel

Selecting the paper type

Þ Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.105)

Þ Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.132)

Selecting the Paper Size

Þ Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.106)

How do I cut the roll paper after printing?

You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and you can cut rolls at a desired position.

Þ Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.122)

How do I print without borders?

How do I print an A4 original enlarged on A2 paper?

How do I print without wasting paper?

Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also specify borderless printing in the printer driver by adjusting the original size to match the paper size.

Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

Þ Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.232)

Þ Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.239)

Þ Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.225)

In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image to match the paper size or width, or you can specify enlargement or reduction before printing as desired.

Þ Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.196)

Þ Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.202)

Þ Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.208)

To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins.

Þ Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.299)

Þ Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

(→P.305)

Troubleshooting 547

Frequently Asked Questions

Question Answer

How do I print without wasting all the blank space on the right side when printing an A4-sized original at A3 size?

By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the printer driver, you can print at

A4 size to ll the width of A3 paper.

Þ Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.299)

How do I print in landscape (or portrait) orientation?

You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to t the roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or horizontal banners.

Þ Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) (→P.253)

How do I print on a custom paper size?

You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the printer driver.

Þ Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.261)

How do I register custom paper sizes?

You can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in the Size Options dialog box of the printer driver.

Þ Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.261)

How do I print lines thicker?

How do I modify how colors are printed?

By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer driver, you can print ne lines thicker to make them easier to see.

Þ Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (→P.180)

You can adjust colors in the printer driver as desired before printing.

Þ Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.172)

How do I use printer driver settings again in subsequent jobs?

By saving settings information in a favorite, you can apply the settings again before printing anytime as needed.

Þ Using Favorites (→P.325)

Can I use the printer in combination with a Color imageRUNNER ?

The printer can be used for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER .

Þ Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

(→P.168)

How do I print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER ?

By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy), you can automatically print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER .

Þ Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

(→P.168)

548 Troubleshooting

Problems Regarding Paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.

1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.


Problems Regarding Paper

Important

• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.


Troubleshooting 549


4.


5.

Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.

Caution

• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury and damaging the printer.

6.


Important


550 Troubleshooting


7.



Important


• The amount of paper pulled from the roll corresponds to the margin of the leading edge.

8.


9.


The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.

Note

• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.

1.


2.

Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.

3.

Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu, and the edge will be cut.

Troubleshooting 551


Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.

1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.


Important


4.


552 Troubleshooting

5.

If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.


6.

If you cannot see the paper, remove the scrap from behind the printer.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

7.


Important


8.


Troubleshooting 553


Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot

Cause

The roll paper is warped.

Corrective Action

Straighten out curls and reload the roll.

Cannot Load Sheets

Cause

The paper source selection is incorrect.


Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the

Cut Sheet lamp .

Paper is not cut neatly

Cause

The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.

Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before it is cut.

The Cutter Unit is installed incorrectly.

The blade of the Cutter Unit is dull.


Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.

Reload the paper correctly.

Install the Cutter Unit correctly.

(→P.526)

Replace the Cutter Unit.

(→P.526)

Paper cannot be cut

Cause

In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is specied in Auto Cut .

In MAIN MENU , Eject or Manual is specied in

Cutting Mode .

The Cutter Unit is not installed.


Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.

Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU .

Install the Cutter Unit.

(→P.526)

554 Troubleshooting

Printing does not start

Printing does not start

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up

Cause

The printer is not on.


Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the

Power button to turn the printer on.

The printer is not selected in the printer driver. (The printer is in

Sleep mode.)

The print job is paused. (The printer is in Sleep mode.)

In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in the printing dialog box and try printing again.

In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or

Print Center ) and try printing again.

In Windows, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.

In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

2.

Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job.

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent

Cause



Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.

The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink

Cause

When the printer was turned off previously, some cleaning operation was terminated.


Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This process may take about ten minutes.

Troubleshooting 555

The printer stops during a print job

The printer stops during a print job

An error message is shown on the Display Screen

Status

An error message is displayed during printing.


Check the error message and take action as necessary.

(→P.576)

The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job, and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.

Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.

(→P.113)

(→P.114)

(→P.114)

(→P.82)

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper

Status

The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it.


This operation is normal.

The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim

Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim

Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial preparation.

When Off is selected under Trim Edge First , the edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.

(→P.516)

Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.

(→P.517)

A print job was received from an incompatible printer driver.

Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for the printer and try printing again.

The printer has received print data that includes HP

RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On .

Set Auto Rotate to Off before attempting to print again.

(→P.50)

The printer is damaged.

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)

Cause

The printer is analyzing the print job.


Either wait a while for printing to resume, or on the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to

300dpi .

(→P.50)

556 Troubleshooting

Problems with the printing quality

Problems with the printing quality

Printing is faint

Cause Corrective Action

You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.

Print on the printing surface.


Because the printer was left without Ink Tanks installed for some time, ink has become clogged in the ink supply system.

Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover.

During borderless printing, the ink was not dry enough before cutting.

Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced

Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or

Draft .

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.516)

After the Ink Tank has been installed for 24 hours, run Head Cleaning B .

(→P.517)

Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover.

1.


2.

Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not over the Platen.

3.

Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover.

4.


For tips on clearing paper jams, refer to the following topics.

• Clearing Jammed Roll Paper (→P.115)

• Clearing a Jammed Sheet (→P.138)

Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in

Roll DryingTime in Paper Details .

(→P.50)

In Advanced Settings in the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

(→P.180)

Troubleshooting 557


Paper rubs against the Printhead

Cause

The paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer. (*1)


Load paper of the same type as you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.110)

(→P.133)

Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to wrinkle.

Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing.

2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Reload the paper.

(→P.110)

(→P.133)

The Printhead is set too low.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

In Head Height , choose Automatic .

(→P.497)

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head

Height to Highest .

(→P.506)

(→P.497)

When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other

lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head

Height to Highest .

(→P.506)

(→P.497)

When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of

Weakest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the

Printhead level in Head Height to Highest .

(→P.506)

(→P.497)

*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer.

558 Troubleshooting


The edges of the paper are dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.

(→P.538)

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.

The paper is wrinkled or warped.

Make sure the same paper type is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.105)

(→P.132)

Make sure the same paper type is specied in the printer driver as on the printer.

1.


2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on previously.

(→P.110)

(→P.133)

A cut line is printed because the function to reduce cutting dust has been activated.

The Printhead is set too low.

If this function is not needed, deactivate

CutDustReduct.

through the printer menu.

(→P.50)

In Head Height , choose Automatic .

(→P.497)

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong or Strongest . If paper still rubs against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by setting Head Height to Highest .

(→P.506)

(→P.497)

The Ejection Guide is soiled.

When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of

Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If paper still rubs against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by setting Head Height to Highest .

(→P.506)

(→P.497)

Clean the Ejection Guide.

(→P.537)

Troubleshooting 559


The surface of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Paper Retainer is soiled.


Clean the Paper Retainer.

(→P.540)

You are using a paper that does not dry easily.

Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime .

The back side of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.

(→P.538)

The Paper Retainer is soiled.

Clean the Paper Retainer.

(→P.540)

Printed colors are inaccurate

Cause

Color adjustment has not been activated in the

Advanced Settings of the printer driver.


In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust colors.

Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or monitor.


In the printer driver, Application Color Matching

Priority is not selected.

Printhead characteristics gradually change through repeated use, and colors may change.

Refer to the computer and monitor documentation to adjust the colors.

Adjust the settings of the color management software, referring to the software documentation as needed.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.516)

Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the printer driver and select Application Color Matching

Priority in the dialog box.

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(→P.491)

(→P.493)

Color may change slightly even on the same model of printer if you use a different version of the rmware or printer driver, or when you print under different settings or in a different printing environment.

Follow these steps to prepare the printing environment.

1.

Use the same version of rmware, printer driver, and other software.

2.

Specify the same value for all settings items.

560 Troubleshooting


Banding in different colors occurs

Cause

The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly.


Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.498)

Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.

Printing does not proceed smoothly because print jobs are interrupted during transmission.

In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in

Feed Priority .

Selecting Band Joint may improve printing results.

Adjust the feed amount in the printer menu by specifying Band Joint in Feed Priority and try printing again.

(→P.498)

The Printhead is out of alignment.

Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too low.


(→P.491)

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the

Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try printing again.

(→P.180)

Troubleshooting 561


Colors in printed images are uneven

Cause

Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images in many solid colors.


Specify Image in the printer driver.

You are printing on paper that curls easily.

Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print

Quality too low.

Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase the level of vacuum holding the paper against the

Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more for the leading edge.

(→P.506)



(→P.180)

Color may be uneven between dark and light image areas.

When using Borderless Printing, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may not be even at the edges.

Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced

Settings of the printer driver.

Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.



(→P.180)

The Printhead is out of alignment.


(→P.491)

Drying documents stacked on each other may cause uneven colors.

To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each sheet separately.

Color density may be uneven if you use Glossy

Paper, art paper, or Coated Paper.

In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs

Cause

The Platen suction is too strong.


Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest .

(→P.506)

The Printhead is set too high.

Lower the Printhead.

(→P.497)

The contrast becomes uneven during printing

Cause

The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.


Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.498)

Execute Fine Band Adj.

during printing.

(→P.498)

562 Troubleshooting


The length of printed images is inaccurate

Cause

In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed

Priority .


To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size, select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust

Length . You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02% increments.

(→P.50)

Documents are printed crooked


Skew Skew Check Lv.

has been set to Loose or Off . Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv.

.

Width Detection has been set to Off .

Choose On in Width Detection .

Documents are printed in monochrome

Cause

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,

Monochrome , Monochrome (BK ink) , or

Monochrome Bitmap is specied in Color Mode .


In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.


Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.516)

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)

Cause

In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.


Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from

Print in the application software’s File menu, and try printing following the steps below.

1.

Remove the check from Open Preview When

Print Job Starts in the Main sheet.

2.

Remove the check from Page Layout in the

Layout sheet.

3.

Click the Special Settings button in the Layout sheet to open the Special Settings dialog box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic

Process .

Lines are misaligned

Cause

The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.



(→P.491)

(→P.493)

(→P.495)

Troubleshooting 563


Thin lines are not printed after switching to Economy

Printing mode

Cause

You have selected Economy Printing in the printer driver before printing.


Clear the Economy Printing check box in the printer driver and try printing again.

Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper

For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.96)

564 Troubleshooting

Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a network

Cannot connect the printer to the network

Corrective Action Cause

The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.

1.

Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct

Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on connecting the cable, refer to the Quick Start Guide.

2.

Make sure the Link indicator is lit.

The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100

Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.

If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.

• Make sure the hub is on.

• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.

Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.

• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.

If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.

• Check the communication mode with the hub.

Although the printer normally detects the hub communication mode and transmission rate automatically

(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection method manually, specifying the communication mode in use.

(→P.414)

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network


The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

(→P.378)

(→P.405)

The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not congured correctly.

The computer you are trying to print from is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly.

(→P.408)

Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly.

(→P.417)

(→P.436)

Troubleshooting 565

Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a NetWare network

Cause

The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured correctly.


Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid frame type is selected. For details, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.411)


Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring

NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.429)

The NetWare server and services are not congured correctly.

Check the following points.

1.

Make sure the NetWare le server is running.

2.

Make sure there is enough free disk space on the

NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may prevent you from processing large print jobs.

3.

Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that the print service is congured correctly and the print queue is available.

4.

If data transmission to a printer on another subnet fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s network protocol settings.

5.

If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify

“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.

The printer was turned off and on when not disconnected from the server.

Leave the printer off for at least 30 seconds, and then restore power.

Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks


The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.

Activate AppleTalk on the printer.

(→P.410)


The computer and printer are not on the same network.

Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are congured correctly.

(→P.433)

(→P.438)

Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if the printer is on another network behind a router.

Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

566 Troubleshooting

Installation problems

Installation problems

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly

In Windows, the device interface driver may not be installed correctly in some cases if you connected the

IEEE 1394 cable before installing the printer driver.

If so, reinstall the IEEE 1394 device interface driver and the printer driver as follows.

Important

• This procedure is based on an example for Windows XP. The name of the wizard may be different in other operating systems.

1.

Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to display the System Properties window.

2.

On the Hardware sheet, click Device Manager to display the Device Manager window.

3.

Right-click Other Devices icon and choose Properties .

4.

On the Driver sheet, click Update Driver to start the Hardware Update Wizard (or the Upgrade

Device Driver Wizard .)

5.

Follow the instructions on the screen.

6.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the CD-ROM drive. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer and follow the instructions on the screen.

The device/interface driver is installed.

The device is detected, and the New Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware Wizard ) is started.

7.


8.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the printer driver folder.

Choose the CD-ROM drive > Driver > WinXP_2K > Driver , and click OK . (For Windows

2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)

9.


The printer driver is installed.

Troubleshooting 567

Installation problems

Removing Installed Printer Drivers

Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.

Removing printer drivers (Windows)

Remove the printer driver as follows.

Note

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must log on with administrative rights, such as those of the “Administrator” account.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller > imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.

2.

Select the printer in the list and click Delete .

3.

Click Yes after the Warning message is displayed.

4.

Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit .

Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Macintosh)

Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.

Open the OS X folder and double-click iPF Driver Installer X .

3.

In the upper left menu, choose Uninstall , and then click Uninstall .

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete , and then click Next .

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete , and then click Next .

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

568 Troubleshooting

HP-GL/2 problems

HP-GL/2 problems

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned.

Cause

The plotter origin is incorrect.


Check the printing commands.

Lines or images are missing in the HP-GL/2 data that was printed.

The memory is full.


Check the size of the data in the print job.

Check the print job and settings.

An HP-GL/2 command not supported by this printer was received.

The printer has received print data that includes HP

RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On .

Set Auto Rotate to Off before attempting to print again.

(→P.50)

Lines Are Printed Too Thick or Thin During HP-GL/2

Printing


The Line Width setting in the main menu is incorrect. Conrm the selection in Line Width . If ne lines are printed faint, setting ThickenFineLines to On in the main menu will print the lines more distinctly.

(→P.50)

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color).

Cause

The color mode is incorrect.


On the printer Control Panel, check the color mode setting.

(→P.50)

For optimal printhead performance, the printer consumes trace amounts of color ink even in monochrome mode.

Printed Colors in Line Drawings are Inaccurate During

HP-GL/2 Printing

Cause

AdjustFaintLines in the main menu is set to On .


Selecting Off may help produce the expected results.

However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

Troubleshooting 569

HP-GL/2 problems

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specied

Cause

The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the source application, is incorrect.


In MAIN MENU , set PageSizeProcess1 to On .

(→P.50)

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specied

Cause

The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the source application, is incorrect.


In MAIN MENU , set PageSizeProcess2 or

Conserve Paper to On .

The layout will be changed to the optimal layout.

(→P.50)

HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time.


Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print. On the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to

300dpi .

(→P.50)

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)

Cause

The printer is analyzing the print job.


Either wait a while for printing to resume, or on the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to

300dpi .

(→P.50)

570 Troubleshooting

Other problems

Other problems

The printer does not go on

Cause

The printer is unplugged.

The specied voltage is not supplied.


Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.

(→P.74)

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound

The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.

• There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen

To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.

• When a Roll is Rewound, There is a Sound as if the Paper is Pulled Taut

This sound may be heard when rolls are loaded. When rolls are automatically rewound, you may hear the sound of pulling paper taut.

• Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing

There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.

• There is a Hissing or Whistling Noise

Parts inside the printer may resonate with the sound made by the Carriage as it moves quickly.

• The Carriage Makes a Noise When Returning

This sound may be heard during automatic adjustment of the printhead. Protective parts by the ink tubes, which move in response to the Carriage, may strongly swing when the Carriage returns, causing a sound when the parts touch the inner wall of the printer.

• If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations

At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.

In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.

Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared

Cause

The printer has not detected the new Maintenance

Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.


Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again rmly.

Restart the printer.

Troubleshooting 571

Other problems

The printer consumes a lot of ink

Cause

Many full-page color images are printed.


In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

Head Cleaning B is used often.

You have just nished initial installation, when more ink is consumed to ll the system.

Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the printer has been moved or stored for a long period or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend not performing Head Cleaning B , to the extent possible.

After initial installation or at the rst-time use after transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink

Tank and Printhead, which may cause the ink level indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

Ink Level Detection

Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.

Ink level detection

Ink tanks specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during printing, which prevents printer damage. (→P.507)

This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.

Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.

is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.

Caution

• After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded

Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use with the printer.

• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.

572 Troubleshooting

Other problems

Disabling ink level detection

1.

On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking the message, press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information , and then press the OK button.

3.

A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection. After checking the message, press the ► button.

4.

After checking the message, press the ► button.

5.


6.

Check the message and press the ► button.

Troubleshooting 573

Other problems

7.

Check the message and press the ► button.

8.


9.

A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen. After checking the message, press the ► button.

10.


Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.

574 Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

Error Message

Responding to Messages

Responding to Messages

Error messages

Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.576)

Other Messages

These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:

Note

• Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh).

Error Message 575


Error Messages

Error messages

Check the message and take the appropriate action.

• Borderless printng not possible. (→P.584)

• Cannot adjust band. (→P.587)

• Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.587)

• Cannot cut this paper. (→P.583)

• Cannot detect papr (→P.582)

• Cannot feed paper. (→P.581)

• Cannot feed paper. (→P.583)

• Cannot print as specied. (→P.587)

• Carriage Cover is open. (→P.595)

• End of paper feed. (→P.583)

• ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.594)

• Execute printhead cleaning. (→P.589)

• File read error. (→P.591)

• GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.594)

• GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. (→P.593)

• GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. (→P.593)

• GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) (→P.593)

• Hard disk error. (→P.591)

• Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.594)

• Ink insufcient. (→P.585)

• Ink Level: Check (→P.586)

• Ink tank error. (→P.586)

• No ink left. (→P.585)

• Insufcient paper for job (→P.579)

• Leading edge detection error. (→P.583)

• Mail box full. Cannot save. (→P.592)

• Mail box full. (→P.591)

• Mail box full. Delete unwanted data (→P.591)

• Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. (→P.591)

• Mail box nearly full. (→P.591)

• Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.590)

• Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.590)

• Multi-sensor error (→P.595)

• No ink tank loaded. (→P.586)

• No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.590)

• No maintenance cartridge. (→P.590)

• No sheets. (→P.581)

• Paper jam. (→P.582)

• Paper loaded askew. (→P.582)

• Paper Mismatch (→P.578)

• Paper size not detected. (→P.579)

• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.578)

• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.578)

• Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.595)

576 Error Message


• PHead needs cleaning. (→P.588)

• Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.590)

• Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.595)

• Printhead error (→P.589)

• Problem with Printhead (→P.588)

• Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.581)

• Rel lever is in wrong position. (→P.583)

• Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.580)

• Roll printing is selected. (→P.580)

• Sheet printing is selected. (→P.581)

• The roll is empty. (→P.580)

• This paper cannot be used. (→P.579)

• This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. (→P.593)

• Top cover is open. (→P.595)

• Unknown le. (→P.595)

• Use another paper. (→P.587)

Other Messages

These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:

• Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.586)

Error Message 577

Messages regarding paper

Messages regarding paper

Paper Mismatch

Cause

You printed a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets, but sheets of different types or sizes of paper were used.


When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same type and size of paper.

Papr Type Mismatch

Cause

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.


Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.82)

(→P.86)

Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.


2.

Either change the type of paper specied in the printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper and change the paper type setting on the printer.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

*Printing will continue if you have set Detect Mismatch to Warning or None .

Papr Size Mismatch

Cause

The paper size as specied on the printer does not match the size specied in the printer driver.


Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to match the size loaded in the printer as follows.

1.


2.

Change the paper size setting in the printer driver to the size loaded in the printer and try printing again.

Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that matches the size setting in the printer driver as follows.

1.


2.

Replace the loaded paper to match the paper size setting in the printer driver and try printing again.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

578 Error Message


Paper size not detected.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has been loaded.


Reload paper straight, in the correct position.

(→P.110)

(→P.133)

Insufcient paper for job

Cause

The printer has received a print job longer than the amount of roll paper left.


Follow the steps below to replace the roll.

1.

Remove the roll.

(→P.113)

(→P.114)

(→P.114)

2.

Load a roll with enough paper left.

(→P.107)

(→P.109)

(→P.110)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.105)

4.

Specify the paper length, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll and you have deactivated the automatic detection function of the remaining roll paper.

(→P.106)



However, the roll paper may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.

This paper cannot be used.

Check supported paper sizes.


Paper that is too large for the printer has been loaded. Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.101)

Paper that is too small for the printer has been loaded.

Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.101)

Error Message 579


Roll printing is selected.

Cause

You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a roll, but no roll is loaded.


Load a roll and try printing again.

To print on a sheet instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a sheet, and then print.

(→P.86)

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.

Cause

A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is loaded.


Press the OK button and remove the sheet.

(→P.137)

Load a roll and try printing again.

(→P.110)


The roll is empty.

Cause

There is no more paper left on the roll.


Follow the steps below to replace the used roll with a new roll of the same type and size.

1.

Remove the roll.

(→P.113)

(→P.114)

(→P.114)

2.

Load the new roll.

(→P.107)

(→P.109)

(→P.110)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.105)

4.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper length.

(→P.106)

580 Error Message

No sheets.

A sheet is not loaded.

Cause



Load paper of the type and size you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.133)


Sheet printing is selected.

Cause

You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet is loaded.


Load a sheet and try printing again.

To print on a roll instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll, and then print.

(→P.82)

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.

Cause

A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded.



Load sheets of the type and size you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.86)

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing.Change the printer driver settings to match the roll already loaded and try printing again.

Cannot feed paper.

Cause

The paper has come out of the printer.

A paper jam has occurred.


Remove the paper, press the Load/Eject button, and reload the paper.

Lift the Release Lever, remove the jammed paper, and reload paper.

If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.

Error Message 581


Paper jam.


A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.

(→P.115)

(→P.138)

Paper loaded askew.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew.


Follow the steps below to reload the roll.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

2.


3.

Align the right edge of the roll paper parallel to the

Paper Alignment Line.

4.


5.


6.


(→P.105)

Follow the steps below to reload the sheet.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

2.


3.

Align the right edge of the sheet parallel to the right Paper Alignment Line and the far edge parallel to the inner paper alignment line.

4.


5.


Note

• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv.

setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams as paper may be askew when it is printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.

Cannot detect papr

Cause

The paper has come out of the printer.

A paper jam occurred in the printer.


Remove the paper that has come out of the printer, press the Load/Eject button, and reload the paper.

(→P.82)

(→P.86)

Lift the Release Lever, remove the jammed paper, press the Load/Eject button, and reload paper.

(→P.115)

(→P.138)

582 Error Message


Leading edge detection error.

Cause

A roll has been loaded when sheets are selected as the paper source on the Control Panel.


Either remove the roll and load a sheet or select the roll as the media source on the Control Panel.

The sheet is loaded askew.

Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.

(→P.133)

Cannot feed paper.

Cause

Paper came out of the feed path during feeding.


Reload the paper correctly and advance it again.

(→P.110)

If the message is displayed when paper is not being advanced, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cannot cut this paper.

Cause

There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide.

There is a foreign object by the Output Tray, obstructing the Cutter Unit.

Remove the foreign object.

You are not using the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper.

Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the paper are met.

Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.96)

You are using paper that is not compatible with automatic cutting.

The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.

The Cutter Unit is not installed.

In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.


Remove the paper.

Cut the roll manually.

(→P.122)

Move the Carriage to the left, remove the paper, and return the Carriage to the right. If the roll cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit, cut the roll manually.

(→P.115)

(→P.122)

Install the Cutter Unit.

(→P.526)


End of paper feed.

Cause

You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.


Release the ▲ button.

Rel lever is in wrong position.

Cause

The Release Lever is pushed back.



Error Message 583


Borderless printng not possible.

Check roll position.

Cause

The paper is loaded askew.


Press the Load/Eject button and reload the paper.

Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the

Roll Holder.

(→P.107)

(→P.109)

(→P.110)

The paper loaded is not compatible with borderless printing.

If you press the Online button and continue printing, the document will be printed with a border.

Load paper compatible with borderless printing and try printing again. Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the

Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.96)

Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use, it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for borderless printing.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the

Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.96)

Check supported paper.

Cause

The print job received species a type or width of paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.


Follow these steps to change the settings of the print job to enable borderless printing.

1.


2.

Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer is selected and try printing again.

For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide.

(→P.96)

If you press the Online button and continue printing, the document will be printed with a border.

584 Error Message

Messages regarding ink

Messages regarding ink

Ink insufcient.

Cause

The ink level is low, so you cannot clean the

Printhead.


Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank.

(→P.508)

The ink level is low, so there may not be enough ink to nish printing.

Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank.

(→P.508)

You can print until the ink runs out by pressing the

Online button. However, if the ink runs out during printing, the following situation will occur depending on the position of the leading edge when it passes through the printer.

1.

No ink left.

is displayed and printing stops. Press the Stop button to cancel printing, or press the

OK button, replace the ink tank that is low with a new one, and continue printing. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

(→P.508)

2.

Ink tank empty. Canceling printing of this page.

is displayed and printing stops. After the paper is ejected, press the OK button and replace the ink tank that is low with a new one.

(→P.508)

No ink left.

There is no ink left.


Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.

(→P.508)

Error Message 585

Messages regarding ink

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.

Cause

Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use rell ink tanks.


The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate action.

(→P.572)

Ink Level: Check

Cause

Not much ink is left.


Prepare a new Ink Tank.

We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink

Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or high-quantity jobs.

No ink tank loaded.

Cause

There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer.


Load or reload the Ink Tank.

(→P.508)

There is a problem with the Ink Tank.

Ink tank error.

Cause

The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.

Replace it with a new Ink Tank.

(→P.508)


Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.

(→P.508)

586 Error Message

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Use another paper.

Cause

The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted when highly transparent lm is loaded.


We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.

(→P.491)

Adjust the feed amount manually.

(→P.501)

Cannot print as specied.

Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger


The loaded paper is too small.

Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.

Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll


The loaded paper is too small.

Load a roll 10 inches wide or larger.

Cannot adjust band.

Cause



Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.

1.


(→P.516)

2.


(→P.517)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.501)

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.516)

2.


(→P.517)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.


(→P.491)

Error Message 587

Messages regarding printheads

Messages regarding printheads

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.516)

2.


(→P.517)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.


(→P.491)

Cannot adjust band.

Cause




1.


(→P.516)

2.


(→P.517)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.501)

PHead needs cleaning.

Cause



Specify Printhead cleaning options.

(→P.517)

If the message is still displayed after Head Cleaning

B , contact the Canon dealer for assistance.

Problem with Printhead

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.


If printing is faint, clean the Printhead.

(→P.517)

588 Error Message

Messages regarding printheads

Printhead error

Cause

An incompatible Printhead has been installed.

There is a problem with the Printhead.


Install a Printhead specied for use with the printer.

(→P.518)

Open the Top Cover. If the Carriage is over the

Platen, replace the Printhead with a new one.

(→P.518)

If, after opening the Top Cover, you see that the

Carriage is not over the Platen, follow the steps below.

1.

Close the Top Cover and press the Online button.

2.

Replace the Printhead.

(→P.518)

Execute printhead cleaning.

Cause



Follow these steps to clean the Printhead.

1.


2.

Printhead cleaning options.

(→P.517)

If this message is still displayed, replace the

Printhead.

(→P.518)

Error Message 589

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

No maintenance cartridge.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.


Install the Maintenance Cartridge.

(→P.528)

Prepare for maint cart replacement.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.


You can continue to print, but prepare a new

Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed.

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

(→P.528)

Maintenance cartridge full.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is full.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

(→P.528)

Maintenance cartridge problem.

Cause

An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has been installed.


Install a Maintenance Cartridge specied for use with the printer.

(→P.528)

590 Error Message

Messages regarding the hard disk

Messages regarding the hard disk

Hard disk error.


There is a format problem with the printer’s hard disk. Press the OK button to start reformatting the hard disk. When formatting is nished, the printer automatically restarts. (Formatting will erase all data on the hard disk.)

File read error.

Cause

Files on the printer’s hard disk have become corrupted.


Restart the printer. Only the corrupted les will be deleted, and the printer will restart.

Mail box full.

Cause

There is no more space on the printer’s hard disk.


Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.

Delete print jobs from the queue.

(→P.449)

Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.

(→P.484)

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.


No more space is available on the printer’s hard disk, so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)

After printing, this message is cleared.


(→P.484)

Mail box nearly full.

Cause

The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer’s hard disk does not have more than 1

GB, combined.


Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

(→P.484)

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data

Cause

100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.


Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

(→P.484)

Error Message 591

Messages regarding the hard disk

Mail box full. Cannot save.

Cause

Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity.


Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.

Delete print jobs from the queue.

(→P.449)


(→P.484)

592 Error Message

Messages regarding HP-GL/2

Messages regarding HP-GL/2

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.

Cause

The printer has received a HP-GL/2 print job that cannot be printed on the paper that has been advanced.


Replace the paper with a type compatible with

HP-GL/2. For details on paper compatible with

HP-GL/2, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.96)

The printer may continue printing, but the printing quality may be affected. Check the printing results.

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or

0904)

Cause

The printer memory is full.


Because the entire print job could not be received, the printer may not be able to print the entire original.

Check the printing results.

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.

Cause

A parameter specied in a HP-GL/2 command is out of the supported range.


Check the print job.

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.

Cause

The printer has received an unsupported HP-GL/2 command.


Check the print job.

Error Message 593

Other Messages

Other Messages

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)

Cause

There is a problem with the print job.


Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.

It is also possible to continue printing in this state.

However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.

If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your

Canon dealer for assistance.

• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

.

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power. However, keep the printer off and remove the roll if the last portion of roll paper was used during a print job and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll. If tape and the Belt Stopper have not been removed from inside the Top Cover, turn off the printer, open the Top Cover, and remove the tape and Belt Stopper before restoring power.

If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your

Canon dealer for assistance.

• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

.

594 Error Message

Other Messages

Top cover is open.

Cause

The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.


Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover again.


Carriage Cover is open.

Cause

The Carriage Cover is open.


Close the Carriage Cover.

(→P.518)


Prepare for parts replacement.

Cause

It is almost time to replace consumables for which service is required.


If Parts replacement time has passed.

is displayed, you can continue to use the printer for some time.


Parts replacement time has passed.

Cause

It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required.



Unknown le.

Cause

Invalid data format.


Check the print job and resend it.

Multi-sensor error

Cause

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be impaired.


Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.


Error Message 595

596

Index

Index

A

About This User Manual .............................................1

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Mac OS X) ........................................386

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Windows) ..........................................343

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows) .......................345

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) ....................398

Adjusting Images ....................................................172

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver .................172

Color Adjustment ..............................................172

Color Mode .......................................................172

Matching ...........................................................173

Adjusting the feed amount ......................................498

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically ..............498

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........500

Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually .....................501

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........503

Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better

Accuracy .................................................................504

Adjusting the Printhead ..........................................491

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically ...491

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually ..........493

Adjusting the Printhead Height ...............................497

Adjusting the Printhead Orientation ........................495

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ..............................506

Adjustments for Better Print Quality .......................491

An error message is shown on the Display

Screen ....................................................................556

Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder ...............129

Installing the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment ....130

Installing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment ....129

B

Back .........................................................................14

Banding in different colors occurs ..........................561

Basic Environmental Performance ...........................78

Packaging materials ...........................................78

Printer .................................................................78

Basic Printing Workflow

............................................80

Borderless Printing .................................................232

Borderless Printing at Actual Size ..................225, 246

Borderless Printing ...................................225, 246

Borderless Printing Method ......................225, 246

Print Image with Actual Size .....................226, 247

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

(Mac OS X) .....................................................229, 250

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

(Windows) .....................................................227, 248

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the

Roll Width ...............................................................239

Borderless Printing ...........................................239

Borderless Printing Method ..............................239

Scale to fit Roll Paper Width

.............................240


Roll Width (Mac OS X) ...........................................243


Roll Width (Windows) .............................................241

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) ....................................236

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ......................................234

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ....232

Borderless Printing ...........................................232

Borderless Printing Method ..............................232

Fit Paper Size ...................................................233

Borderless printng not possible. .............................584

Check roll position. ...........................................584

Check supported paper. ...................................584

C

Canceling print jobs ..................................................92

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X .......................94

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ...........92

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .........................93

Cannot adjust band. .......................................587, 588

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................587, 588

Cannot connect the printer to the network .............565

Cannot cut this paper. ............................................583

Cannot detect papr .................................................582

Cannot feed paper. .........................................581, 583

Cannot Load Sheets ...............................................554

Cannot print as specified.

.......................................587

Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/

LTR (vertical) or larger ......................................587

Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll ..............................................587

Index 597

Index

Cannot print over a NetWare network ....................566

Cannot print over a network ...................................565

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network .......................565

Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ..566

Carriage ....................................................................16

Carriage Cover is open. .........................................595

Centering originals .................................................288

Checking for Nozzle Clogging ................................516

Checking Images Before Printing ........................... 311

Checking Ink Tank Levels .......................................513

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ......................488

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ...............489

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...........489

Using RemoteUI ...............................................488

Using the Control Panel ...................................488

Checking the Layout Before Printing

(Mac OS X) .....................................................315, 384

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing .. 311

Open Preview When Print Job Starts

(Windows) ........................................................ 311

Preview (Macintosh) .........................................312

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

(Windows) ......................................................313, 339

Checking the Print Quality ......................................515

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge

Capacity .................................................................535

Choosing a Paper for Printing ................................188

If the paper type is not listed for selection ........188

Media type ........................................................188

Choosing Paper for Printing ...................................188

Choosing the Document Type and Printing

Conditions (Mac OS X) ...........................................185

Choosing the Document Type and Printing

Conditions (Windows) ............................................183

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ...............................538

Cleaning the Paper Retainer ..................................540

Cleaning the Printer ................................................537

Cleaning the Printer Exterior ..................................537

Cleaning the Printhead ...................................517, 541

Cleaning the Printhead .............................517, 541

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ..............................138, 552

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ......................... 115, 549

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) .............353

Object Adjustment dialog box ...........................354

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) ..357

Object Adjustment dialog box ...........................358

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) .................392

Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................392

Matching pane ..................................................393

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) .....394

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome ..............394

Colors in printed images are uneven ......................562

Configuring NetWare Network Settings

..................429

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually

....414

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................433

Activating AppleTalk on the printer ...................433

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)

..........434

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................438

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................436

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)

..........436

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer

..............403

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands .............................................................406

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility ................................378, 404, 430

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel ......................................................................405

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Macintosh) .............................................................431

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Windows) ..............................................................417

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network ettings .............................................................410, 432

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network

Settings .......................................................... 411, 420

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network

Settings ..................................................................408

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

....................382

Checking a preview of the settings ...................382

Checking a print preview ..................................383

Confirming Print Settings (Windows)

......................337

Checking a preview of the settings ...................337

Checking a print preview ..................................338

Conserving roll paper .............................................299

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without

Top and Bottom Margins ........................................305

No Spaces at Top or Bottom

(Conserve Paper) .............................................305


Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) .....................308


Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ......................306

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90

Degrees ..................................................................299

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) .....299


Degrees (Mac OS X) ..............................................302

598 Index

Index


Degrees (Windows) ................................................300

Control Panel ......................................................18, 20

Correcting Print Misalignment ................................491

Cutter Unit ..............................................................525

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .............................329

Automatic Cutting .............................................329

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) .........331

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ...........330

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper

Automatically ..........................................................126

D

Deleting Saved Jobs ..............................................484

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Mac OS) ..........................................................487

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

(Windows) ........................................................486

Using RemoteUI ...............................................485


Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper .................. 119

Device Settings Sheet (Windows) ..........................370

Device Setup Utility ................................................377

Digital Photo Front-Access .....................................373

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs .............................460


(Macintosh) .......................................................463


(Windows) ........................................................462

Using RemoteUI ...............................................461


Displaying Details of Saved Jobs ...........................475


(Mac OS) ..........................................................478


(Windows) ........................................................476

Using RemoteUI ...............................................475

Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box .........448

Documents are printed crooked .............................563

Documents are printed in monochrome .................563

E

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or

Errors Occur ...........................................................415

End of paper feed. ..................................................583

Enhanced Printing Options .....................................172

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk

.................490

ERROR Exxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................594

Error Message ........................................................575

Error Messages ......................................................576

Error messages ................................................576

Other Messages ...............................................577

F

Execute printhead cleaning. ...................................589

Favorites Sheet (Windows) ....................................366

Feeding Roll Paper Manually ................................. 118

File read error. ........................................................591

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images

(Mac OS X) .............................................................177

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images

(Windows) ..............................................................174

Frequently Asked Questions ..................................547

Front .........................................................................13

G

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ..................594

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and

Colors for Printing ...................................................180

Advanced Settings ...........................................180

Color settings ...................................................181

Enhancing printing quality ................................182

Print Priority ......................................................180

Print Quality ......................................................181

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ..........593

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. .......593

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full.

(xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) .................................593

H

Handling Paper .........................................................96

Handling rolls ..........................................................104

Handling sheets ......................................................131

Hard Disk ................................................................439

Hard disk error. .......................................................591

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................594

How to use this manual ..............................................1

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified

.................................................................570

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified

.........................570

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome

(or color). ................................................................569

HP-GL/2 Printing ....................................................162

HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time. .......................570

Index 599

Index

I

HP-GL/2 problems ..................................................569

HTML Version of the Manual for Printing ....................5

Printing a group of individual topics in the manual ..................................................................7

Printing a group of topics in the manual ...............5

Printing selected topics ......................................10

L

IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board ...................73

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ....................571

Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding

Occurs ....................................................................562

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................377

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh) ............400

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) ..........372

Improving the Print Quality .....................................515

Initializing the Network Settings .............................416

Ink insufficient.

........................................................585

Ink Level Detection .................................................572

Disabling ink level detection .............................573

Ink level detection .............................................572

Ink Level: Check .....................................................586

Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .............................................17

Ink tank error. .........................................................586

Ink Tanks ................................................................507

Installation problems ..............................................567

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility ...............................................................377, 430

Insufficient paper for job

.........................................579

Introduction .................................................................1

Layout Sheet (Windows) ........................................362

Leading edge detection error. .................................583

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows) ................563

Lines are misaligned ..............................................563

Lines Are Printed Too Thick or Thin During HP-GL/2

Printing ...................................................................569

Lines or images are missing in the HP-GL/2 data that was printed. .....................................................569

Loading and Printing on Rolls ..................................82

Loading and Printing on Sheets ...............................86

Loading Rolls in the Roll Holder Slot ......................109

Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder ............................107

Loading the Roll in the Printer ................................ 110

Loading the Sheet in the Printer .............................133

M

Mac OS X Software ................................................379

Mail box full. ...........................................................591

Mail box full. Cannot save. .....................................592

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data .......................591

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ......591

Mail box nearly full. .................................................591

Main Menu Operations .............................................33

Accessing Menus ...............................................34

Executing menu commands ...............................36

Specifying menu items .......................................35

Specifying numerical values ...............................36

Main Menu Settings ..................................................50

Adjust Printer ......................................................57

GL2 Settings .......................................................55

Information .........................................................61

Interface Setup ...................................................58

Job Management ................................................54

Maintenance .......................................................59

Paper Details ......................................................52

Paper Menu ........................................................51

System Setup .....................................................59

Main Menu Settings (During Printing) ......................62

Information .........................................................63

Job Mgmt Menu ..................................................64

Main Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................387

Configuration using Advanced Settings

............388

Configuration using Easy Settings

...................387

Main Sheet (Windows) ...........................................347

Configuration using Advanced Settings

............348

Configuration using Easy Settings

...................347

Maintenance ...........................................................507

Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................528

Maintenance cartridge full. .....................................590

Maintenance cartridge problem. .............................590

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation ..............................................................319

Mirror ................................................................319

Orientation ........................................................319

Rotate 180 degrees ..........................................319


Orientation (Mac OS X) ..........................................322


Orientation (Windows) ............................................320

Managing Queued Jobs

(Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ......................449

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ...............451

600 Index

Index

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...........451

Using RemoteUI ...............................................450


Manually Loading Paper to the Position for

Printing ...................................................................136

Matching Sheet (Windows) ....................................355

Driver Matching Mode ......................................355

ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host

ICM Mode .........................................................356

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) ...390

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .....351

Menu Structure .........................................................37

Main Menu ..........................................................37

Main menu during printing ..................................48

Submenus ..........................................................47

Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared ........................................571

Messages regarding HP-GL/2 ................................593

Messages regarding ink .........................................585

Messages regarding paper .....................................578

Messages regarding printheads .............................588

Messages regarding printing or adjusment ............587

Messages regarding the hard disk .........................591

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ....590

Moving saved jobs ..................................................470


(Macintosh) .......................................................474


(Windows) ........................................................472

Using RemoteUI ...............................................470

Multi-sensor error ...................................................595

N

Naming Personal Boxes .........................................456


(Mac OS) ..........................................................459


(Windows) ........................................................457

Using RemoteUI ...............................................456

Network Environment .............................................401

Network environment .......................................402

System requirements .......................................401

Network Setting ......................................................401

Network Setting (Mac OS X) ..................................431

Network Setting (Windows) ....................................417

No ink left. ..............................................................585

No ink tank loaded. .................................................586

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. .......................590

No maintenance cartridge. .....................................590

No sheets. ..............................................................581

O

Optional accessories ................................................73

Other Maintenance .................................................542

Other Messages .....................................................594

Other problems .......................................................571

Other useful settings ..............................................316

Output Stacker .......................................................140

P

Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) .....................364

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ...............................395

Page Setup Sheet (Windows) ................................359

Paper ........................................................................96

Paper cannot be cut ...............................................554

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Mac OS X) .............................................................389

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Windows) ..............................................................350

Paper is not cut neatly ............................................554

Paper jam. ..............................................................582

Paper loaded askew. ..............................................582

Paper Mismatch .....................................................578

Paper rubs against the Printhead ...........................558

Paper size not detected. .........................................579

Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) ............361

Paper Sizes ............................................................101

Rolls .................................................................101

Sheets ..............................................................102

Papr Size Mismatch ...............................................578

Papr Type Mismatch ...............................................578

Parts replacement time has passed. ......................595

PHead needs cleaning. ..........................................588

PosterArtist .............................................................374

Prepare for maint cart replacement. .......................590

Prepare for parts replacement. ...............................595

Preparing to Transfer the Printer ............................542

Print Area ..................................................................79

Rolls ...................................................................79

Sheets ................................................................79

Printed colors are inaccurate ..................................560

Printed Colors in Line Drawings are Inaccurate

During HP-GL/2 Printing .........................................569

Printer Driver ..................................................333, 379

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) ........................379

Printer Driver Settings (Windows) ..........................333

Printer Hard Disk Operations .................................439

Index 601

Index

Printer Menu Operations ..........................................31

Job Management Menu Operations ...................32

Main menu operations during printing ................31

Main menu operations when no print job is in progress .............................................................31

Submenu operations ..........................................32

Printer Modes ...........................................................24

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel .......28

Mode transition ...................................................25

Modes .................................................................24

Offline, and state of the Control Panel

...............27

Online, and state of the Control Panel ...............26

Submenu mode, and state of the Control

Panel ..................................................................28

Printer Parts .............................................................13

Printer Specifications

................................................74

Printhead ................................................................515

Printhead error .......................................................589

Printheads ..............................................................515

Printing a List of Saved Jobs ..................................464

Printing at full size ..................................................218

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) .............................222

Printing at Full Size (Windows) ..............................220

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ....253

Printing CAD Drawings ...........................................151

Printing does not start ............................................555

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a

Color imageRUNNER .....................................168, 214


Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) .................170, 216

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. .......................................171, 217

Registering a hot folder on your computer ......170,

216

Scanning the original and print an enlargement ............................................171, 217


Color imageRUNNER (Windows) ...................168, 214

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. ......................................169, 215

Registering a hot folder on your computer ..................................................168, 214

Scanning the original and print an enlargement .............................................169, 215

Printing enlargements or reductions .......................196

Printing from Mac OS X ............................................90

Printing from the application software ................91

Registering the printer ........................................90

Printing from Windows .............................................89

Printing is faint ........................................................557

Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..........................286

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) .........156

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ...152, 154

Easy Settings ...................................................152

Print Target .......................................................152

Print targets for line drawings and text .............152

Printing Line Drawings and Text

(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................153

Easy Settings ...................................................153

Print Target .......................................................153

Print targets for line drawings and text .............153

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......268

Free Layout (Windows) ....................................268

imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh) ......269

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Mac OS X) .............................................................272

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Windows) ..............................................................270

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .....................274

Roll paper (banner) ..........................................274

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) ..277

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ...275

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ..........................279

Page Layout .....................................................279

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ......282

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ........280


......................................163

Easy Settings ...................................................163

Print Target .......................................................163

Print targets for office documents

.....................163

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)

..................166

Printing Office Documents (Windows)

....................164

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..................261

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver .....................................................261

Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use ....................................................................261

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

(Mac OS X) .............................................................266

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

(Windows) ..............................................................262

Printing by using Custom Paper Size ...............264

Printing by using Custom Size .........................262

Printing on Oversized Paper ..................................218

Oversize ...........................................................218

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets .................80

Roll printing ........................................................80

Sheet printing .....................................................81

602 Index

Index

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ......................288

Print Centered ..................................................288

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ..291

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ....289

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ...................294

Print Centered ..................................................294

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

(Mac OS X) .............................................................297

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

(Windows) ..............................................................295

Printing Photos and Images ...................................142

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ...............148

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .........142, 146

Easy Settings ...................................................142

Print Target .......................................................142

Print targets for photos and images .................142


(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................144

Easy Settings ...................................................144

Print Target .......................................................144

Print targets for photos and images .................144

Printing Posters in Sections ...................................285

Page Layout .....................................................285

Printing procedure ....................................................80

Printing Saved Jobs ...............................................465


(Mac OS) ..........................................................468


(Windows) ........................................................467

Using RemoteUI ...............................................466


Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners

(Large-Format Printing) ..........................................253

Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................253


(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) ........................258

Print the banner ................................................259

Register a Custom Page Size ..........................258


(Large-Format Printing; Windows) .........................254

Creating the banner in the application ..............255

Printing the banner ...........................................255

Registering a Custom Paper Size ....................254

Printing With Watermarks .......................................316

Watermark ........................................................316

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ..............................................317

Printmonitor ............................................................400

Problem with Printhead ..........................................588

Problems Regarding Paper ....................................549

Problems with the printing quality ...........................557

Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper ..........................................................564

R

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ..........................127

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ....581

Rel lever is in wrong position. .................................583

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. .................................................................586

Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder .................... 114

Removing Installed Printer Drivers .........................568

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

(Windows) ........................................................568

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

(Windows) ........................................................568

Removing printer drivers (Windows) ................568

Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh) ..................................568

Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder Slot ............. 114

Removing the Roll from the Printer ........................ 113

Removing the Sheet ...............................................137

Renaming Saved Jobs ...........................................479


(Mac OS) ..........................................................482


(Windows) ........................................................481

Using RemoteUI ...............................................479

Replacing Ink Tanks ...............................................508

Compatible Ink Tank .........................................508

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank ...........508

Replacing an Ink Tank ......................................509

Replacing the Cutter Unit .......................................526

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ....................528

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge ..................528

Precautions when handling the Maintenance

Cartridge ...........................................................528

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ..............529

Replacing the Shaft Cleaner ............................533

Replacing the Printhead .........................................518

Compatible Printhead .......................................518

Precautions when handling the Printhead ........518

Replacing the Printhead ...................................519

When to replace the Printhead .........................518

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ......208

Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................208

Scaling ..............................................................208

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

(Mac OS X) ............................................................. 211

Index 603

Index

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

(Windows) ..............................................................209

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..................202


Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................202

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

(Mac OS X) .............................................................205

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

(Windows) ..............................................................203

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ...........196


Fit Paper Size ...................................................196

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

(Mac OS X) .............................................................199

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

(Windows) ..............................................................197

Responding to Messages .......................................575

Error messages ................................................575

Other Messages ...............................................575

Roll Holder Set .................................................73, 128

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed

Slot .........................................................................554

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. .....580

Roll printing is selected. .........................................580

S

Saved Print Jobs ....................................................441

Output Method ( Send job to ) ..........................442

Storage destination ..........................................443

Saving Print Jobs ...................................................445

Using the printer driver (Mac OS X) .................447

Using the printer driver (Windows) ...................445

Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the

Printer Driver ..........................................................444

Specifying Output Method ................................444

Specifying Save and Print ................................444

Searching Topics ........................................................3

Selecting the Paper Source ............................104, 131

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) ......................105, 189

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) ...................132, 190

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ..................452


(Mac OS) ..........................................................455


(Windows) ........................................................454

Using RemoteUI ...............................................453

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows) ...........371

Sharing the Printer in Windows ..............................418

Sheet printing is selected. ......................................581

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .................365

Specifications

...........................................................74

Hard Disk ............................................................77

Ink .......................................................................75

Interface .............................................................75

Paper ..................................................................76

Printer .................................................................74

Printing performance ..........................................74

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings .......159

Color Compatibility ...........................................159

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings

(Windows) ..............................................................160

Specifying NetWare Print Services .........................424

Choosing the type of print services ..................424

Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server .......................................................425

Specifying NetWare Protocols ................................427

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ....................191

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

(Mac OS X) .....................................................194, 380

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

(Windows) ......................................................192, 335

Specifying Printer-Related Information ...................413

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .................122

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing) .........123

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit) .......................................124

Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position)

.............................................125

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .................120

Mac OS X .........................................................121

Windows ...........................................................120

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) .........................106

Specifying the Printer's Frame Type

.......................422

Specifying the Frame Type Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ..............422

Specifying the Frame Type Using the Printer

Control Panel ....................................................423

Status Monitor ........................................................372

Status Print ...............................................................67

Checking the information in the Status Print report .................................................................67

Printing Status Print Reports ..............................67

Submenu Display .....................................................65

GL2 Settings .......................................................66

Information of the loaded paper .........................65

Printer information ..............................................66

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels .............................................................65

Support Pane (Mac OS X) ......................................399

604 Index

Index

Support Sheet (Windows) ......................................369

Switching Modes ......................................................29

Switching the printer online/offline

......................29

Switching to Menu mode ....................................30

T

The back side of the paper is dirty .........................560

The contrast becomes uneven during printing .......562

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ....................................................................555

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink ...................................................................555

The edges of the paper are dirty ............................559

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed

Correctly .................................................................567

The length of printed images is inaccurate .............563

The printer consumes a lot of ink ...........................572

The printer does not go on .....................................571

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent ..................................................................555

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ...............556

The printer stops during a print job .........................556

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job

(the carriage stops moving) ............................556, 570

The roll is empty. ....................................................580

The surface of the paper is dirty .............................560

Thin lines are not printed after switching to Economy

Printing mode .........................................................564

This paper cannot be used. ....................................579

This type of paper is not compatible with

HP-GL/2. ................................................................593

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ........................268

Top Cover (Inside) ....................................................15

Top cover is open. ..................................................595

Troubleshooting ......................................................547

Turning the Printer On and Off .................................22

Turning the printer off .........................................23

Turning the printer on .........................................22

Types of Paper .........................................................96

Updating paper information ................................99

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide ..................97

U

Unknown file.

..........................................................595

Updating the Firmware ...........................................546

Confirming the firmware version

.......................546

Updating the Firmware .....................................546

Use another paper. .................................................587

Using Favorites ......................................................325

Favorites ...........................................................325

Using Favorites (Mac OS X) ...........................328, 385

Using Favorites (Windows) ............................326, 341

Printing using the favorite .........................327, 342

Registering a favorite ...............................326, 341

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ...............374

Edit Using PosterArtist .....................................374

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

(Windows) ..............................................................375

Using RemoteUI .....................................................407

Using the Output Stacker .......................................140

Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER ......168

Utility Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................397

Utility Sheet (Windows) ..........................................368

V

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Mac OS X) .............................................................391

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Windows) ..............................................................352

W

When to Replace Ink Tanks ....................................514

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink .........................................................514

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the

Display Screen .................................................514

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the

Display Screen .................................................514

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ........536

If a message for checking the Maintenance

Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen .......536

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen ..536

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted ..........................................536

Windows Software ..................................................333

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned. .....................569

Working With Various Print Jobs ............................142

Index 605

©CANON INC. 2008